Skip to main content

Full text of "Volume 39, Number 09 (September 1921)"

See other formats




THE ETUDE 


PRESSER’S MUSICAL MAGAZINE 

PRICE25 CENTS SEPTEMBER. 1921 $2.00ATEAR 


























































f Brings this 11O-piece Gold Deco 
lartha Washington Dinner Sefi 



Important 

Hartman guarantees that 
every piece in this set is 
absolutely first quality. 
Don't confuse these with 
“seconds” or "run of 
kiln” dishes which show 
imperfections. This is a 
standard or "open" pat¬ 
tern. Replacement pieces 


f Hartman wants you to put this superb gold decorated, initialed Dinner Set on your own table on free trial. Only by actu-i 
, ally seeing the beautiful, famous Martha Washington pattern can you realize how wonderful it is. Send only $1 and we shin r 
, the full set—110 pieces in all. Use the dishes 30 days. Then if you are not so delighted that you would not part with them I 
return the set and we will refund your $1 and pay transportation charges both ways. If you keep them take nearlv a 
to pay on our easy terms. Send the coupon today. y y 

Your Initial in 2 Places on Every Piece—5-Colori 
Floral Decorations and Gold 


IMF 1 


Wonderful artistic effect is i 


ot only by the 
.. The one initial \ 
>n by special fired ] 


■ and attractive shape of every dish, but by the 
'*■- *' e superb decorations of scrolls, leaves 
appearB in two places on every piece. 


All Handles Covered with Gold 


Every handle is covered with polished gold „ 
ware itself is beautiful, lustrous, snowy white, 

S“? dles . every piece has two border lines as u pattern so eq. 

Martha Washington.” A set you will be proud to display before your guests. Ele 
artistic, and yours now at a bargain price. And all the dishes you need -110 of them - yoi 
free trial, then easy Payments. Shipped on 30 days' free trial direct from our Chicago wan 
• weight about 90 pounds. You must not miss this opportunity. Mail the coupon today. 


:u at* you bee on me most costly impo 
id besides the initial, floral decoration 
Wishing touch. No other pattern to 


FREE / H CT^Hr : - 

SSSSS/Sm* . . 

catalog gives you the ' ‘‘back and you will refund 
most amazing bargains / ,?° r S l tat,on charges both way 
in furniture, rugs, lino- / remain wTttTyou" ' 
leum. stoves, watches. / S U 

silverware, dishes, / 
washing machines, . N «*ne. 


_ J .-svu niu.i iiot iiiise tine opportunity. Mail tne coupon today. 

Order No. 324CCMA13. Bargain price, $32.85. Pay $1.00 now. Balance $3.00 monthly 

|| A RTM A Kl furniture & carpet co. 

nHIl I IVIMli 

CC i € 3T « $ 31 3 2C & m N © p f ® X ® 2 


--wing machin 
aluminum war 


engines and cream • 
separators, etc.- / R F - E 
**11 on our easy / 

SiSS/*-- 

or letter brings it / Occupation 
Free. ^Let Hart- / 


SUBSCRIPTION PRICE $2.00 per year i 
States, Alaska, Cuba, Porto Rico, Mexico, 
Philippines. Panama, Guam, Tutulla, and 
of Shanghai. In Canada. $2.25 per year, t 
countries, $2.72 per year. 

Single copy. Price 25 cent.. 

REMITTANCES should be made by post-of 


foHrtMfeVm'vM* 

DISCONTINUANCES.—Owing to the educational 
character of THE ETUDE a majority of it. readers 
do not wish to miss an issue. Therefore, the pub¬ 
lishers are pleased to extend credit covering a Twelve 
Months’ subscription beyond expiration of the paid- 


, Those of o. 


>f this ( 


jf "remitting 


PRESSER’S MUSICAL MAGAZINE 



A MONTHLY JOURNAL FOR THE MUSICIAN, THE 
MUSIC STUDENT, AND ALL MUSIC LOVERS. 

Edited by James Francis Cooke 
-SEPTEMBER. 1921 


Vol. XXXIX No. 9 


Entered as second-class matter Jan. 16, 188*. at tj 1 * at 

Philadelphia. Pa under the Act of March 3, 1879. . 

Copyright. 1921, by Theodore Presser Co. for U. S. A. and Great Britain 


RENEWAL.—No 
the wrapper of th. 
printed the 



MANUSCRIPTS.—Manuscripts should be addressed to 
THE ETUDE. Write on one side of the sheet only. Con¬ 
tributions on music-teaching and music-study are solicited. 
Although every possible care is taken the publishers are not 
responsible for manuscripts or photographs either while in 
their possession or in transit. Unavailable manuscripts will 

ADVERTISING RATES will be sent od application. 
Advertisements must reach this office not later than the 1st 
of the month preceding date of issue to insure insertion in the 


The World of Music 


cesses of the War 



or many years one of “La Camerata” is the name of an organiza- 
r stars in grand opera, tion instituted at Milan, Italy, for the per 
lblic again this year in formauee of works by the ^lesa n f * * 8 !J 



_ mmm 

The California Music Teachers’ Associa- .Tuly 26 to 29, ill Philadelphia, the home of K|l||pIik on tlle cve of hla d 


’ " ; received sudh l 

2 




rS.vSE*®*-'* 

2*c£- 


fmmm 

Amer|a^n’P765. *1? ft?."roYde^stTmJr- 


MM 


„ 1 LIB _ 

I *. l ' v\. ~ 

£kki M CONTENTS FOR SEPTEMBER, 1921 "~-— 




■J* a5K^5STA«S 


•.IS-ft 



SarH 



































































































THE ETUDE 


BEET EM BEE 1921 Page 555 


TI ’s si m L, 




Special Bargains 

Recent Publications at Low Introductory 


IMPORTANT:— Order by Offer Number. The prices are for 
cash with order, transportation charges prepaid. At these low 
offer prices these works are not returnable. No more than one 
copy of a work at these prices. Remember there is a bonus on 
$3.00 and $5.00 purchases made from Offers Nos. 1 to 59, inclusive. 


The Merits of Many of These Works have Brought Thera 
$3.00 and $5.00 Purchases of Works Selected from these 
on Page 556 Will Obtain for the Purchaser FREE 

Piano Studies I 



OFFER No. 12 

Easy and Progressive Lessons 
C. Czerny 



OFFER No. 15 
First Twelve Weeks at the 
Pia oforte 



RECENT PIANO SOLO PUBLICATIONS-SHEET FORM 

, C.,h rrice, 50 cent, „ cents 



rf;,S3! 


'"introductory Ca,h Price 25 


' THEODORE PRESSER Ca 

I MUSIC PUBLISHERS AND DEALERS 


for Music Lovers 

Prices Good Only Until September 30, 1921 


Offers 
That 

I MakeYour) 
Dollar 
Worth 
More 


Success in the Short Time They have been on the Market. 

“Special Bargains” and the “Advance of Publication Offers” 
a choice of the Works in the Bonus Offer. 


Vocal Collections 


These low prices are made to give musicians an opportunity of 
becoming acquainted with these late publications and thereby the 
publishers rouse an enthu iasm that will create many more 
desirable sales. Included in these Special Bargains are the 
Advance of Publication Offers on Page 556 of this issue. 


OFFER No. 19 
Seven Songs from 
11 Way Down South ” 

By Lily.Strickland Price, $1.25 

Introductory Cash Price, 60 cents 


OFFER No. 20 

Songs from the Yellowstone 

By Thurlow Lieurance Price, $1.00 

Introductory Cash Price, 40 cents 

Lieurance stands out 


I Cantatas and Operettas] 




OFFER No. 24 
Milkmaids and Farmers 





Introductory" Cash Price, 40 « 

esny 




RECENT VOCAL PUBLICATIONS-SHEET MUSIC 


Biography_ j 


Child’s Own Book of Great P 



PHILADELPHIA, PA. 

1710-1712-1714 CHESTNUT STREET 


OFFER No. 26 
A Virginian Romance 


don although iMs^qua? 'in disrespects" t'o 

■ '.°x s X e t ed a„ fo : 


From Death Unto Life 

Introductory Cash Price,"sB cents 






SSStatiS 


GET A BONUS 

FOR A $3.00 OR $5.00 PURCHASE 


Each 33.00 or $5.00 order made during September, 1921, of any 
of Offers Nos. 1 to 59 (on these pages and the one following) will entitle 
the purchaser to a choice of any one of the valuable music publica¬ 
tions designated below without additional charge. Be sure to re- 
e entitled to, naming your choice and stating 


quest the bonus y< 
that it is a bonus. 

Your Choice of Any One 
of These Works Free 
with a $3.00 Order 






Your Choice of Any One 
of These Works Free 
with a $5.00 Order 


sSSiSat™* 

Studio Song Album 

An excellent volume oj jongs. ^ None 











































































































THE ETUDE 


Page 556 SEPTEMBER 1921 


Advance of Publication Offers 

New Works to be Published Offered at Special L ow Cash Prices 


These forthcoming Publica¬ 
tions are offered at low esti¬ 
mated cost of manufacture 
prices at which we will now ac¬ 
cept orders for them. As soon 
as these works appear from 
press they will be delivered. 


Real Purchasing Opportunities Especially 
Attractive to Those in the Music Profession 

ORDER BY OFFER NUMBER - Send All Orders to Theodore Presser Co. 


| METHODS and STUDIES 

OFFER No. 41 
Player’s Book 

School of the Pianoforte, Vol. 3 

By Theodore Presser 

Advance of Publication 
Cash Price, 25 cents 

There is no work in our catalog that ha 
been received with such enthusiasm as th 




First Announcement of These Five Books I 

To Be Published by the THEODORE PRESSER CO. 


OFFER No. 36 
Evangelistic Piano Playing 

By Geo. S. Schuler 

Advance of Publication 
Cash Price, 50 cents 

•his is the first and only work of 


t how the 


hould t 


OFFER No. I 
Instruc.ive Pieces in All Keys 

By M. Greenwald 

Advance of Publication 
Cash Price, 40 cents 

This is a volume of twenty-four stud 
neces fo: the oiauoforte, each in a diffei 


BONUS OFFER:—Purchasers of 
$3.00 or $5.00 worth of these 
advance of Publication Offers 
and Special Bargain Offers on 
Pages 554 and 555 are entitl¬ 
ed to a valuable music publi¬ 
cation FREE—SeePage 555. 


ORGAN 




OFFER No. 37 
The Prince ot Peace, Cantata 

By J. Trum -'* 

3 Of 


Highly with each and every ke; 

OFFER No. 39 

The 1\ 


OFFER No. 53 
Wedding and Funeral Music 
for the Pipe Organ 

Advance of Publication 
Cash Price, 60 cents 

In addition to all of the convention 
numbers usually heard at weddings a 

large amount of interesting additional rr 

march rhythm together with soft yolunti 
ies, opening pieces, postludes, etc. 

OFFER No. 54 
New Pipe ® rg ®JJ bl .° ca e t c i t o , ® n 

75 c 



tma - • _ n rhythm and No 49 Original Four Hand Pi 



Still 

EliliSS 1 3S5 |Theo. Presser Co. SIS. Phila., Pa.| 


____;_:- - - 


-ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $2.00- 


THE ETUDE 


SEPTEM BER, 1921 


Single Copies 25 Cents 


VOL. XXXIX, No. 9 


: i 


Enrico Caruso 

“Extra! All about the death of Caruso!” 

A little negro newsboy shouted his papers up the back 
street. A clerk, a drayman, a janitress, an artist and a 
millionaire builder stopped him to buy copies. There, on the 


-p”ob« a bT,"' 


crowded newspaper of to-day. I 
thing else tells the story of the 
unparalelled voice and beautiful 
lad, who once, digging 


art of the little 
in the 



y the greatest male singer of history. Only a presi¬ 
dent or a monarch could command as much attention in the 
crowded newspaper of to-day. This, possibly, more than any- 


wondered whether he might be a great Sculptor or a great 
singer. Artists have no hesitation in saying that, had he given 
as much attention to sculpture as to singing he might, have 


No Possible Substitute 

There is no substitute for real musicianship. No amount 
of advertising bluff or, as the Europeans call it, Reclam, 
can take its place. Recently Mr. William Shakespeare, on his 
wav home to England, made a short visit to The Home For 
Retired Mmic Tmcher, in Philadelphia, in company with Mr. 
Tamps H Rogers the noted American composer. Mr. Shakes- 
peare, who in 1866 won the King'. Scholarship at the Royal 
Academv of Music, London, and the Mendelssohn Scholarship 
at Leipsig in 1871, then went to Lamperti for many years, 
devoting ^his time since then to teaching the voice At the 
Home Mr. Shakespeare espied a fine grand piano in the parlor^ 
In a few minutes he was seated and played one of the Bach 
Organ Fugues, a Chopin number and a Mendelssoh 
with all of the charm, freshness and distinctness of a y 


become one of the great artists of the time. 

So extensive have been the tributes and detailed biograph¬ 
ical articles in the daily press all over the country that, it 

M 1.1..• „1 .nolo fnrfhPV 


unaffected by his great fame. There was never any suggestion 
of affectation or bombast in his letters or in his personal greet¬ 
ings. He was imbued by a kind of boyish spirit of fun, which 
even through his serious moods, seemed to indicate that the 
plaudits of the masses did not overwhelm him in the least. 

Had Caruso lived and sung fifty years ago his art would 
have ceased with the last heart beat. How grateful the world 
should be that it has been preserved in the marvelously beautiful 
records which have been made of practically all of the best 
numbers in his repertoire. His voice was so rich, full, pure and 
luscious in its finer quality that it recorded wonderfully. Jenny 
Lind sang for thousands and her voice went with her to eternity. 
Caruso sang for millions and will go on singing for millions for 
generations to come. His records become classic models by 
which all great tenors of the future must be judged. 

Salve! Caruso! America claimed you, tho the 
world showered it’s laurels at your feet. It is 


less of a young con- 
In comparison with some of the voice 
teachers"w^ had known, this was quite a revelation. The solid 
musical training he acquired in the sixties and seventies remained 
with him to 1921 and seemed ripened in beauty by the years. 
No wonder Mr. Shakespeare has stood for years in the front 
ranks of the old world’s great vocal teachers. 


What to Cut Out 

There is an art in elimination. Many teachers at this time 


r teachers, often have difficulty in 


knowing what to cut 
r has all the time in 


out. This is the problem that the builder has all the time in 
making- over buildings. With the high cost of materials and 
labor, he endeavors to save all that is good. Sometimes it is 
really necessary to tear a building down to its foundations in 
order to build the kind of structure desired. There are teachers 
who make a practice of this and waste years of really valuable 
work, in order that their own ideas may be earned out. There 
never was a greater mistake. Of course you c 
fully turn a shanty into a church; but there is v 
of material that can be used by the skillful 1 
saving of time. 




“A little knowledge is a dangerous thing.” Don’t bother 
it who said it. The saying has worn its way into the warp 
woof of our language and is accepted by everybody. In 
ing is it more evident than in music. So many people 
assume that they know something about music, when they do not 

C ' C " Take the matter of the keys and of major and minor. It 
is not difficult to comprehend these things; but no one really 
knows the kev system until all of the tonalities are mastered 
and the wonderful scheme is realized. It is all very simple then. 
Instead of spending a little time in going far enough ahead to 
get this grasp, countless good folks content themselves w:th 
asking others: “What is the difference between major and 
minor?” “Why. do we use double sharps?” “What is the differ¬ 
ence between the melodic minor and the harmonic minor?”—all 
these, the very simplest facts about music, explained in any good 
Scale and Arpeggio book, in a few minutes becomes a positive 
t for life. Yet there are thousands of 


; sharps or three flats and 



Amateur Orchestras 

i notes with pleasure the great increase in 
lateur orchestras of America. The altogether 
irk being done in public school and in high 
indicate, very clearly indeed, that in a few 
:ur organizations will develop enormously. 

Like all other organizations of the kind, they depend very 
largely upon the enthusiasm of a few individuals who can see the 
biff things and lead the way to accomplishment. Like any 
successful business, such organizations thrive until the spirit is 
lost, until they get into the hands of. little-minded people who 
imagine that success comes through the minute observation of 
parliamentary rules, special regulations, finicky, promptness, 
while the spirit of co-operation in its real sense flies out of the 
window. Such, we understand, has been the history of endless 


of Boston, New York and other cities, have survived. In London 
the “Wandering Minstrels,” which for years met in the home 
of Lord Gerard Fitzgerald, had a career of thirt 
This wonderfullv successful amateur symphony c 
concerts which netted for charity over $80,000.01 



| % 

V - > 






























































































I?:?' V. 


«? * 


Some Editorial Correspondence 

To The Etude: . 

I would like your advice as to a diploma for music, 1 
finished tenth grade and one book above tenth grade at thiiteen 
years. I have been teaching for the past year and now am 
fifteen years, and I like teaching very much. I would like my 
diploma. Must I go to a music school to get it r How long 
would I have to go? Can a music teacher without a diploma 
present one? Can I enter a music school without an eighth- 
grade diploma? What is the price of a diploma? 

Etude Reader. 

Pear Fhiend: 

A diploma is a piece of paper with printing on it, accom¬ 
panied by the signatures of certain individuals attesting to the 
achievements of some other individual. 

The paper and the printing have no more value than any 
other printed matter. 

The worthwhileness is all in what is represented by the 
authority and the integrity of the persons, of the offices of the 
people, who have signed and sealed the diploma. 

All recognized schools grant diplomas. These diplomas 
are often of great value to the student in getting a start in 
after-life. The point is, however, that the more the school is 
recognized the more valuable the diploma becomes. We know 
of a colored herb doctor, whose window is a veritable museum 
of conglomerate remedies, who proudly displays the diploma 
of some correspondence course which grants him the degree 
of “Doctor of Philosophical Wisdom.” We have seen dozens 
of diplomas that have no more worth than yesterday’s news¬ 
paper, because the schools granting them were of corresponding 
value. 

You can not buy a diploma, that has any value whatever, 
with any currency but knowledge and ability acquired by hard 
work. 

Unless you are one of those fortunate people who have the 
gift of teaching themselves, you will have to pay for the in¬ 
struction leading to knowledge. You may go to the very 
finest teacher in the world and get the best instruction; but, 
unless you have the gift of assimilating it and have the ambition 
and energy to take advantage of it, you may fail dismally and 
never be entitled to a diploma. 

Then, who shall say whether you are entitled to a diploma 
or not. We know of one firm which has spent a fortune in 
advertising books, sold at a ridiculously high price, which 
actually granted a diploma to two children entitling them to 
teach piano when the children were really cornetists. This 
stamped, once and for all, every diploma issued by such a firm 
as a flagrant fraud. No publishing house making a business 
of selling music has any right to confer a diploma. 


The Only Policy 

“One lesson, and only one, history may be said to repeat 
with distinctness; that the world is built somehow on moral 
foundations; that in the long run it is well with the good; in the 
long run it is ill with the wicked.”— James Anthony Froude. 

Several times we have printed the above quotation in The 
Etude. Its great significance lies in the fact that the famous 
English historian, at the prime of a lifetime devoted to the study 
■ of the history of all time, decided to write a short essay epito¬ 
mizing all that he had learned from his immense researches. He 
began the essay in part with the words we have reprinted. 

It is comforting to have reiterated the great truth that 
the right survives and the wrong perishes. We do not have to 
go to Kant or Froude to learn that “The essence of true nobility 
is neglect of self,” that “Right is the sacrifice of self to good 
and wrong the sacrifice of good to self, one the object of infinite 
love, the other the object of infinite detestation and scorn.” 
No sensible person denies the element of self-interest in every 
professional or business undertaking; but it has come to be the 
code of all sensible men to look out for the interests of the other 
fellow as a matter of decent business policy. Such businesses 
are the ones which inevitably survive in the long run. 

All this preamble is the result of reading a great many let- 


_ 

|. 


ters received from musicians in all parts of the country complain¬ 
ing of the methods employed by certain firms in attempting to 
make the public believe, that through some undefined power 
they can compel the profession to use their publications to the 
exclusion of all others and at the same time offering diplomas, 
medals, scholarships and what not, as bait for the introduction 
of their methods to the exclusion of others. Judging from 
the letters we have received, the detestation and scorn oi the 
responsible members of the musical profession in America for 
these purely commercial methods are unbounded. 

If a method or a collection of books is really worth while, 
nothing can stand in the way of its success. It will not be 
necessary to employ musical mercenaries to exploit it, nor will it 
be necessary to use threats of legislative action which would 
compel every teacher to use state standardized proprietary 
methods. No uncorrupted legislative body in America ever will 
compel any such action. Such threats are ludicrous, and only 
the unsophisticated back-woods teacher is intimidated by them. 
When we recount the number of teachers who have told us of the 
prodigious sums they have expended to firms publishing such 
proprietary methods, only to discard them in disgust after a 
comparatively short trial, the future of such schemes is evident, 
no matter how much may be spent to exploit them. 

There are numerous excellent sets, collections and methods 
published by the best American publishers at a fair price and 
sold by decent methods, without any attempt to bamboozle the 
purchaser into believing that, he is buying anything but the 
regular legitimate educational materials. 

The latest trick employed by unscrupulous firms is to 
advertise all sorts of additional advantages in the way of scholar¬ 
ships, diplomas, medals, etc. The purchaser is approached by 
glib agents who talk fluently of the wonderful “free” advan¬ 
tages. The prospect, filled with excitement by the ideas that he 
has been awarded something for nothing by some beneficent 
proprietary firm, signs a blank without reading the context. 
Shortly he receives a set of books and a bill that nearly “knocks 
his head off.” The blank was really an order for the books, a 
cheap book agent dodge—simply the old lightning rod swindle 
again. If the purchaser refuses to pay he is threatened with 
suit. Never sign anything presented by a stranger without 
reading every speck of type on the page. 

This nefarious scheme has been tried out time and again 
by book publishing firms. Such firms last for a time and then 
vanish. Why? Read the quotation from James Anthony 
Froude. - 

Dollars and Cents in Music 

Over four times as many phonographs and records were man¬ 
ufactured in the United States, in 1919, as in 1914. The piano 
'industry nearly doub'ed itself. Industrially, America seems to 
be leading the world in music. 

Blasco Ibanez, the great Spanish thinker and novelist, has 
pointed out that this is the age of music, that music is the great 
product of our times and one of the greatest forces of the 
moment. While much of the commercial advance in music in 
recent years must of course be credited to the manufacture o» 
very raw and very much machine-made stuff, one must always 
remember that in a country developing as rapidly as the United 
States and attempting to assimilate millions of people from 
other lands as well as our own, whose educational advantages 
in the past have been almost nil, we must pass through the oil¬ 
cloth and ingrain carpet stage, before we can walk on beautiful 
tapestries. 

Notwithstanding the trash and junk poured out of “music 
factories,” if it were possible to make a musical assay it would 
probably be found that the musical status of America compares 
on the whole quite favorably with any country anywhere. 

It may be interesting to note “that the manufacture of 
musical wares in the United States during 1919 was over 
$325,000,000.00. Immense numbers of people are supported 
thereby and millions of others are inspired through music to 
higher and greater accomplishments. It is only in such manner 
that we can even imagine the tremendous practical value of 
music to the state at this time. 




.: ;■ - ’ : ^ 


______ 


THE ETUDE 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 559 



How to Develop Staccato Touch 

By TOBIAS MATTHAY 

Eminent English Pedagogical Specialist Sometimes Known as “The English Leschetizky 



To ask me to answer this question is on a par with 
asking a painter “how to learn to paint red”, or to paint 
green! One does not learn how to paint red nor green, 
but, in the first instance, one must learn how to paint 
correctly! Similarly, one cannot learn to play Staccato 
without in the first instance learning how to produce 
tone correctly; and one of the incidents in achieving this 
last is that it will also enable us to produce staccato and 
legato results. 

But we cannot learn to produce tone correctly without 
going into the whole question of how to play the Piano¬ 
forte. Now success here depends primarily on two quite 
distinct though ever closely related factors: (1) musical 
perception and attention; and (2) production of the 
sounds required to express the results of such musical 
attention and perception. Both aspects of this problem 
must be studied and their laws understood if we would 
succeed pianistically; and these two aspects must always 
be studied in conjunction. Seeing then that all these 
things inevitably go hand in hand, I must therefore, in 
order to answer the question, try to cover the whole 
ground of the fundamental principles of Piano-playing, 
or at least must try to touch upon the main facts and 
laws concerned. 

To begin, there is no such thing as “Staccato-touch”. 
The act of Touch is only another name for the act of 
tone-production; and this completed, may, as an after¬ 
effect, be followed either by legato, or by the shortest 
form of duration— staccato. In other words, the act of 
tone-production, when completed, may either be followed 
by an instantaneous damping of the sound (staccatis- 
simo), or the produced sound may be allowed to continue 
for the full value of the written note, or any part of that 
value—more, or less Tenuto or even legato, or may be 
allowed to continue even beyond such written value- 
forming that over-lapping of sounds termed legatissimo. 

Ceasing Tone 

In short, the act of touch, proper (the act of tone- 
production) must be completed before there can be any 
question of continuation or non-continuation of the sound. 
Hence we cannot learn how to cease sound, unless we 
first understand how to make sound. Clearly then realize 
that the act of Touch and the act of Continuation are two 
quite distinct things. The first depends on how you 
make the key go down, and the second depends on how 
long you hold it down afterwards. Most of the mis¬ 
chief in the now out-of-date, emperic teachings arose 
from non-recognition of this simple fact. 

In the old days, when nothing was known of the true 
fundamentals of Technique—the means of expression 
and execution—the student was told to play staccato and 
legato, but was not told how this was to be accomplished, 
nor was he told anything of the laws that underlie the 
processes of playing, generally. Instead he was given 
miles of scales, exercises and studies, with the forlorn 
hope that he might tumble to it somehow, by good luck. 
Unfortunately most students never seemed to have any 
luck that way! 

Thus, also, the old ideas (?) of staccato “touch” were 
quite hazy, and incredibly erroneous, just as were those 
concerning legato and the act of touch itself. Since it 
was not realized that the act of producing the tone 
may be precisely the same whether we are playing 
staccato or legato, it was absurdly supposed that “stacca¬ 
to” implied some special way of going at the key! In 
fact, there was no glimmering of the truth that every¬ 
thing, so far as tone is concerned, depends on what we 
do with the key during its down-movement. Instead 
for staccato, the illuminating advice was given, that we 
must play “as if picking up burning cinders”—a truly 
monumental piece of misdirection! 

Indeed, had it not been for the persuasive example of 
the great artists one heard—the Rubinsteins, the Liszts, 
etc.—and who unknowingly, did all the right things, 
technically and musically, none of us ever would have 
learned to play successfully. 

Besides this, we had criminal mis-teachings of Touch 
itself. We were told that “the finger only must be used.” 
that it must be “a little hammer-like action of the finger” 
coupled with an absurd lifting of the fingers, so as to 


enable us better to “strike the key down,” which one 
should never do. We were even told to “lay a penny on 
the back of the hand, to keep it quiet,” with the result 
thjt many unfortunates were led to form those terrible 
habits of stiffening the fingers, hands and arms which 
effectually prevented their ever reaching any possibility of 
self-expression, and turned Piano-playing for them into 
purgatory instead of heaven. Then we had “methods” of 
playing based upon “holding the knuckles in,” or the 
fetish, “Pressure,” indiscriminately applied, thus again 
achieving the same certainty of being debarred from ever 
playing easily. And when, at last, there was a little lift¬ 
ing of the cloud of superstition, and some began to realize 
that “free weight” was at the bottom of things, then they 
spoilt all, by failing to recognize the whole truth, and 
instead taught fully resting weight, fully passed on 
from note to note, thus again wrecking many a would-be 
and could-be artist for life. 

Let the Damper Rebound 

All such foolishness of the old fully-fledged or half- 
fledged empiric methods becomes impossible, once the 
simple fact is recognized, that the hammer instantly re¬ 
bounds from the string the moment the key’s depression 
is completed, even when we play legato, and in spite of 
the fact that we keep the key down, and that, therefore, 
nothing further can possibly be done to alter the tone, 
however mnch we may press, squeeze or weigh upon the 
key after that. Holding the key down (for tenuto or 
legato) simply means that the damper is kept off the 
strings, and that these therefore, continue sounding — 
softer and softer—so long as the key is held depressed-’ 
and it requires indeed a very slight effort to encompass 
that! Whereas, to obtain Staccato, we must see to it that 
the damper, itself, is also allowed to rebound, and thus 
to stop the sound almost at the moment of its birth. 
Hence, finally, to achieve the sharpest staccato, we must 



learn to allow the key itself to be free to rebound up¬ 
wards. Staccatissinio itself, however, is but com¬ 
paratively rarely required in playing. As a matter of 
fact, most supposed staccato passages are not really 
staccato at all—staccato meaning totally lacking in Dura¬ 
tion; whereas most of such passages really consist of 
notes given with some degree of Duration; not notes 
really as short-sounding as possible, but held slightly, 
though, may be, very slightly indeed. Thus, in learning 
to play staccato passages, we must learn to give all shades 
of Duration from almost full legato (or tenuto) down to 
practically no Duration whatever—staccatissimo. 

To sum this up: the difference between Staccato and 
Legato (as shown) depends on what we do after the 
act of tone-production (the act of touch) has been com¬ 
pleted; and since we can folloiv the act of touch 
either by a tenuto or staccato, it is clear that staccato 
does not imply a different kind of tone-production than 
does legato. In staccato the act of ton e-making is more 
or less immediately followed by the act of tone-stopping, 
that is all! 

Hence it comes to this, that if we would understand 
“staccato-playing”—tone-stopping—we must properly un¬ 
derstand that which precedes it—the process of tone¬ 
making. Here the first thing to learn is that the act 
of tone-making implies an act of attention; and that this 
act of attention is duplex in its nature—it implies both 
timing the key and feeling the key. As to “timing 
the key” this means that we must time our action with 
the key so that this act culminates and finishes at the very 
moment that the tone begins, a moment determined in the 
first place by the musical time-place of each note, and 
in the second place by the mechanism of the Piano-key, 
by the place during key-decent where the hopper slips 
from underneath the hammer. As to “feeling the key” 
this means that we must physically feel what force the 
key requires from us, so that the sound produced shall 
be precisely in consonance with our musical judgment 
and feeling at the moment. 

Aural and Muscular Sense 

Now to ensure the first element of this duplex form of 
attention (and doing) we must be alert aurally\ and 
to ensure the second we must be alert through our “mus¬ 
cular-sense”—or “kinaesthetic sense,” as the later psychol¬ 
ogists have now dubbed it. 

The act of timing and feeling the key, in this sense, is 
best realized by the practice of one of the first experi¬ 
mental exercises given in one of my works,— 

Here are the directions, in brief: 

(I) Sound the notes of a convenient chord by 
carefully weighing the keys down—which means, 
employ arm-release strictly in answer to the resist¬ 
ance those keys are felt to offer you during their 
descent. 

(II) Repeat the preceding experiment, but now, 
at a definitely purposed moment “let go" at the 
wrist-jont—that is, omit the slight exertion of the 
hand which you find sustains the weight of the arm 
at the wrist; the fingers continue to hold the chord 
as before, while the wrist drops. 

(III) Repeat this last, but now cause the weight 
to “disappear” at the very moment that it is left in 
the lurch at the wrist through the cessation of the 
hand’s exertion—the arm. in fact, becoming supported 
by its own muscles, and thus ceasing to bear down¬ 
wards upon the hand, fingers and keys. Be sure to 
time the cessation of all finger-exertion as well as 
hand-exertion at this very moment, and you will find 
that the keys will then rise, carrying up with them 
the fingers still loosely lying upon them, and thus 
ceasing the sound. 

(IV) Finally, learn to time this last process at the 
very moment that the tohe appetrs, and you obtain a 
perfect staccato. 

In studying this exercise, we learn to realize two most 
important facts : (1) the extreme shortness of the time 
occupied in making the tone—during key-descent only; 
and (2) that the cessation of the ' tcne depends solely 











































THE ETUDE 


Page 560 SEPTEMBER 1921 

and purely upon the complete and accurate cessation 
of all the energy employed during the production ot 
the tone. Incidentally we also learn to attend to key- 
resistance during key-descent (without which there can 
he no accuracy musically) ; and we also learn to listen 
for (and to) the implicated sound each time. 

Moreover, we begin to realize that basic of all truths, 
that Music always and ever implies Movement or Pro¬ 
gression ; and this last I consider to be the most im¬ 
portant of all my teachings. Thus, as I have pointed 
out elsewhere: (1) we have the movement of the 
key itself towards the place in key-descent where tone 
begins; (2) the movement of groups of quick notes 
towards the pulse (or beat) ahead; (3) the movement 
of the phrase towards its rhythmical climax, near the 
end of it ; and again the movement of successions of 
phrases towards the more important landmarks of a 
composition; and finally, its progress towards the com¬ 
pletion of its shape—always Movement, Progression and 
Growth. No musician ever has felt Music apart from 
such sense of the progression of it, although not neces¬ 
sarily aware of this true explanation of his sensation of 
musical-shape. But here again the actual teachings of 
the old days was as misleading for the poor student, as 
it well could be. Instead of being told to look for the 
natural movement and growth underlying all musical 
experience, he was given the supposed explanation that 
it consisted of chunks of “accented or unaccented notes, 
—brick and mortar, dead, lifeless and futile! 

Moreover, the little exercise just described also leads 
us to recognize that the process of tone-production 
physically depends on the interaction of three main ele¬ 
ments, finger-exertion, hand-exertion and arm-weight- 
forearm and upper-arm may be distinguished later. All 
these three elements have their bearing upon every kind 
of touch, but their balance has to be modified in harmony 
with the ever-changing requirements of Tone, Duration, 
and of Agility. Finally, there is a fourth element of 
Touch, the Forearm Rotation element, which perhaps 
is the most important of all, since misapplication of it 
is by far the most frequent cause of technical failure. 
Let me therefore try to make this clear, so far as this 
can be done in a few words. 

The Thumb in Technic 

Realize that the two bones of the forearm are so pivot¬ 
ed at the elbow that the “natural” position of the hand 
is with the thumb upwards, and that to bring the hand 
into its playing position at the keyboard, these two bones 
have to be twisted one upon the other, and that this 
implies a muscular exertion, although a slight one, 
and this exertion must be continued to prevent the hand 
and arm rolling back into their passive position. It is 
plain therefore that none can go to the Piano without 
making this “forearm rotatory exertion” towards the 
thumb-side of the hand. Now that is where all the error 
creeps in. Not being aware of the exertion he is mak¬ 
ing rotationally towards the thumb, he continues this 
exertion, while intending to use some other finger 
say the fourth or fifth finger, and is surprised to find 
these quite helpless and apparently “weak.” Hence have 
arisen those millions of exercises and studies, written 
with the forlorn hope of overcoming this deficiency—by 
accident! Needless to point out that the practice of 
such material, with the forearm held stiffly, rotationally, 
will only tend to form into unbreakable habit one of the 
worst faults to which it is possible to succumb. 

The correction of this, like all other technical faults, 
is entirely mental. The sufferer must be made to realize 
that, when he wishes to use any other finger after the 
thumb, it is imperative that he must, in the first place 
cease the rotational effort (however slight) which he 
is making towards the thumb—he must eliminate the 
exertion which is preventing his having any basis for 
the exertion of the supposed two “weak” fingers. With 
the cessation of the rotational exertion towards the 
thumb, the fourth and fifth fingers at once become 
“strong,” because the tendency of the forearm to roll 
over towards them now supplies quite a satisfactory ba¬ 
sis for their action up to a considerable tone-amount; 
and, if still more is required, the forearm is exerted 
in addition in their favor. 

Eight Steps 

Being perhaps the most important of all my technical 
teachings, let me summarize the successive steps I have 
previous shown to be the only logical succession in sur¬ 
mounting rational difficulties, and also so-called “finger- 
individualization” in particular: — 

Step I:—With the hand gently clenched as a fist, 
and held sideways (with thumb upwards,) sound two 
adjacent black keys by weight-release of the whole 
arm. Play the two notes quite softly and evenly. 



Step II -.—Now turn the hand over into its usual 
playing position (with knuckles up) and still with 
the fist play the same exercise. .,. , r , 

S tc p ] 11 -—Playing quite softly, still zmth the fist, 
nozo rock from side to side, sounding the notes 



PP 


Step IV:—You have now learned to play the 
legato-resting. Next repeat this rocking from side 
to side upon the keyboard, but without sounding 
the notes at all, and you have the form of “ resting” 
required for Staccato. Finally add a light jerk of 
the forearm, as you reach each note alternately, thus 
sounding it, and uow make a crescendo towards the 
end-note of the rhythmical figure, in fact playing the 
final note quite loudly. 

You have now added the tone-making impulse 
for each sound, while the “resting” continues for 
the duration of each figure. Whether the result is a 
legato passage or a staccato passage is determined 
by your resting either in the first or second way. 

Here also you have the basis of all finger passages 

_ a "finger" passage played zxrithout using the fingers 

at all! In fact, do not be satisfied until you can 
(really quite easily) play the above figure up to quite 
a good speed. 

Step V:—After this, unbend the fingers, and 
practice again the last two steps, but now use any 
set of two fingers, such as 1-3, 2-3, or 3-5; such 
exertion of the fingers corresponding to the degree 
of the forearm rotational jerks supplied as a basis 
for their action. 

Steps VI, VII and VIII -.—Are details leading up 
to the correct playing of the five-finger succession of 
notes—that reminiscence of the many eznl hours 
spent in our childhood! 

Thus, in answering the question “hew to learn Stacca¬ 
to-touch,” we see it is impossible to consider any such 
point in Technique without the bearing upon it of the 
f undamental laws of all technique, and indeed of those 
of Interpretation itself. In short, the laws of Technique 
and those of Interpretation are indissolubly bound togeth¬ 
er, and perhaps most of the mischief in the past has 
arisen from the attempt to study Technique dissociated 
from Music, whereas the first care of the teacher should 
be to insist on the close bond there is between them. 

Musical sense cannot be expressed without perfect 
mastery of Technique, but Technique cannot be achieved 
unless definite musical purpose is kept before one as the 
aim and end-all of every technical effort attempted. 
Acquiring Technique is all a matter of association, and 
in the end every nuance of Technique must arise sponta¬ 
neously in responce to our vivid sensing of musical feel¬ 
ing itself. 


Motives and Measure Bars 

By Sidney Bushell 

A good deal of confusion often exists in the mind of 
the pupil owing to improper instruction regarding the 
above. He is informed that a certain time signature 
indicates so many beats to the measure and that every 
measure must be of equal value. While this may be 
true almost without exception, it is more by coincidence 
than intent, as will be shown. 

The real purpose of the time signature is not to in¬ 
dicate the number of beats to a measure, but the number 
of beats to a motive. Thus, in % time (three quarter 
notes to the motive), it will frequently be found that 
the first and last measures of the piece will be unequal. 
Upon inquiry, the pupil will be hazily informed that the 
balance of the first measure will be found at the end 
of the selection. Why it should be thus split up no sat¬ 
isfactory explanation is proffered. 

Now the purpose of the measure bar is to indicate 
where the accent falls in the motive, which is on the note 
immediately following the measure bar. This note is 
known as the melisma note, and since, as a rule, the 
same motive is preserved throughout the piece, it natur¬ 
ally follows that the measure bar always appears at 
regular intervals once the accent is established, and con¬ 
sequently, the number of “beats to a measure” will tally 
throughout, with the frequent exception of the first and 
last measures. 


Twenty “Dont’s” for Piano Teachers 

The following were selected by the class in Musical 
Pedagogy at Judson College, Ala., under the direction I 
of Edward Leeson Powers: 

1 Don’t stop studying. Study teaching^ Read The 

Etude. Take lessons if possible. Broaden your- I 
self along general as well as musical lines 

2 Don’t use example without explanation and vice 

' versa: the average pupil gets but little from either 

used alone. They are likely to be con using and 
misleading unless one is used to supplement the 

3 Don’t^take it for granted that your pupil under¬ 

stands In some way make him prove it, by 
explaining in his own words or by demonstration. 
The mere assertion that he understands is not a 

4. Don’t let interest flag. Without interest there will 

be but little progress. The first essential is that 
you be intensely interested yourself. 

5. Don’t ignore a pupil’s likes and dislikes. His inter¬ 

est and his musical development will depend upon 
consulting his preferences as far as is compatible 
with sound musical and pedagogical principles. His 
pieces should be such that he can learn to like them 
within a reasonable time. It is not necessary that 
they should 1 please him at first. 

6. Don’t fail to be punctual, businesslike and system¬ 

atic. These things are essential. However, 
teaching should not be purely a business proposi¬ 
tion. One should enjoy it and not think too much 
about the money it brings it. 

7. Don’t let outside affairs interfere with your work. 

Recreation is necessary but should be kept second¬ 
ary. Outside affairs may be so regulated that 
they help. One should be helpful in the life of the 
community but not at the expense of his work as a 
teacher. 

8. Don’t tell too much, but teach by questioning. Ques¬ 

tions compel attention, stimulate interest and 
require the pupil to think for himself. 

9. Don’t use praise or censure unwisely. These 

are powerful forces for good when used witli 
discretion; but they are capable of doing much 
harm if used too much or at the wrong time. 

10. Don’t say “DON’T” when you can say “DO.” 

Attention should be on the thing to be done instead 
of on the thing to be avoided. Moreover. 
“DON’TS” irritate and rub the wrong way. 

11. Don’t get into ruts. Variety is better than monotony. 

Surprise your pupils now and then; they will enjoy 
it and it will make your work more interesting for 

12. Don’t neglect the development of your pupil’s musi¬ 

cal sense. Better neglect the fingers than the 
ear. Unless the pupil hears and feels musically, 
any finger training he gets will be of little value 

13. Don’t be vague and indefinite. Definite aims and 

clear comprehension are essential to intelligent 
practice. Require definite things. Some definite 
goal constantly in sight saves much time and 
makes the work fascinating. 

14. Don’t tolerate carelessness or thoughtlessness. 

Nearly all pupils will have these faults if the 
teacher is at all tolerant of them. 

15. Don’t give up until all means have been tried. Per¬ 

haps the trouble is with your diagnosis; if you are 
sure that is right change your prescription. 
Remember there is no occupation that requires more 
ingenuity, patience and perseverance than does the 
teaching of music. 

16. Don’t neglect health. You cannot have the steady 

nerves and the cheerful disposition you will need 
unless you are physically fit. 

17. Don’t be careless in appearance, manners or speech. 

Refinement and culture are as important as knowl¬ 
edge and skill. The time lias passed when 
musicians were expected to be crude, cranky and 
queer. 

18. Don’t forget that your greatest tasks are to teach 

your pupil how to practice and help him to 
love music. These are fundamental; if you can 
succeed in these the battle is more than half won. 

19. Don’t attempt to fit the pupil to a system. Since 

no two pupils are alike your teaching will have 
to be varied to suit the taste, disposition, ability, 
ambition and mental and physical peculiarities of 
each pupil. 

20. Don’t forget the Golden Rule. If you apply it con¬ 

stantly you will be considerate, agreeable and sin¬ 
cere and will give the best that you have to every 
pupil in every lesson. 


THE ETUDE 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 561 


F O N 

/ \ : 5 ' : '■ v''" ' ti . ■ ■ 

. 

fiK 

A Square Deal for the Music Teacher 



Let Us Have a Better Financial Status for the Professional Musician 

; 


By CHARLES E. WATT 



1 


(Mr Watt takes the very definite stand that ‘‘the la¬ 
borer is worthy of his hire." He claims that American 
musicians have practically no professional status and that 
the remedy is for all professional musicians to insist upon 
a charge for every possible kind of musical service. 
Everyone knows how sensitive the average lazier or the 
average physician is about being approached for profes¬ 
sional advice except through regular channels. We feel 
however that recognition of the profession will not come 
entirely by making a stiff stand for proper business com¬ 
pensation. Gatherings of representative musicians at 
which the foremost men of the community attest their in¬ 
terest and belief in music, after the manner of the highly 
successful Banquets if the Philadelphia Music Teachers 
Association, have a great power in impressing the layman 
and identifying the profession of music as one no longer 
the monoply of itinerant music teachers or long haired 
sensualists .— Editor’s Note.) 

The professional musician, native born, has hardly any 
established status to-day, in many parts of the United 
States. He may, and does at times, through individual 
merit or a combination of fortuitous circumstances rise to 
a position of honor and money making; but, on the 
whole, the public has no method of differentiating him 
from the student, the amateur or the dilettante and he is 
classed, indiscriminately, with all of them and at the 
same time a preponderance of favor is still thrown to the 
foreigner. . , 

According to Webster the dilettante is one who pur¬ 
sues music (or any of the fine arts or sciences) merely 
as a pastime. The Amateur, according to the same 
authority, is one who cultivates an art or study from love 
of attainment and without reference to gain or emo u- 
ment. The Student, basically (although all musicians 
must remain students of a kind through life), is one 
who has not yet sufficient technic, repertoire or interpre¬ 
tative intelligence to entitle him to be ranked as ready 
for paid work. The Professional, on the contrary, is 
one whose attainments in all these lines,and m many 
others is such (or should be) that he is amply ready to 
take up any definite piece of employment in his particu¬ 
lar line and do it skillfully and artistically, with due ref¬ 
erence to the art in general and of all other educational 
considerations. 

The amateur and the dilletante classes are absolutely 
necessary for the proper development and support of 
music in a community; for it is they who buy tickets for 
concerts and in every way support the growing musical 
interests of the place. Without students the prospect for 
any continued life for music in any given locality would 
be indeed meager. But, all’of these are positively in 
different relation to the art and to the public than is the 
professional musician; and this relation should be under¬ 
stood both by them and the public. 

The professional musician always has been too. much 
absorbed in his own work to think much about this and 
“too busy” to take the proper steps to protect himseli; 
but, in these times of difficult living, a state of things has 
Arrived when he must take the necessary action or he will 
be utterly overthrown by the force of circumstances. . 

- In the “Nothing for Nothing” propaganda, the basic 
idea is that all professional musicians must receive ade¬ 
quate pay for every bit of public work done and must not 
under any circumstances belittle and enervate their earn¬ 
ing powers by giving away either lessons or public 
appearances. This meets the objection that (m many 
localities at least) the public has been so steeped with the 
idea that music is a God-given-thing, and as such must 
be turned back to all His creatures free of cost o'- obliga¬ 
tion, that it seems impossible to do more than get pay for 
actual lessons, and that it is only the really noteworthy 
artists who can secure pay for public singing or playing. 

r singing in the church is considered as the 




sympathy and almost all concert appearances as “for the 
good of the cause.” ., 

Of course, in the larger musical centers these ideas 
are rapidly being done away with and there are to-day 
hundreds of musicians, yes, thousands,, who get pay for 
appearing in churches, theatres, movie houses, lodges, 
clubs, concerts, private musicales, weddings and funerals 
But, this state of things should be universal instead of 
merely sporadic; and it should become the earnest and 
persistent effort of professionalism to make it so. And 
the whole process harks back to the statement that.the 
public must appreciate and respect the difference between 
dilettante, amateur and student classes as measured up 
against professionalism; and the latter class must insist 
also upon a higher status within its own ranks than can 
possibly be attained by the other classes. 

Association Hints 

Beginning with the Music Teachers’ National Associa¬ 
tion, there should be no cessation of agitation until 
standards are established and examinations instituted 
whereby the work of professional musicians—teaching or 
concert—shall be required to reach a certain point of 
excellence and remain without faltering. Then the 
states must take this up individually and insist upon 
standardization of teaching and playing and this must be 
followed by communities and individual schools and insti¬ 
tutions. And having such a standard established, those 
whose lives are devoted to music and whose living de¬ 
pends upon it, must assume an attitude of inflexible de¬ 
termination that no work of their status is to be given 
away under any circumstance. 

The Public accepts -work at the appraisement of the 
workers, and for musicians to falter in their determina¬ 
tion to set standards and prices and maintain them is 
but to invite an indefinite continuance of the idea that all 
music is, sometimes, procurable for nothing. The dilet¬ 
tante and the amateur should, as a rule, stay out of paid 
positions, or at least they should not work gratuitously in 
those which should yield pay; and in those few cases 
where it seems fair and desirable for them to do any 
public work at salary they should stubbornly maintain a 
price and conditions which will aid professionals to hold 
the same ground. 

An Unusual Position 

A certain wonderful ■ young contralto whose career on 
the American concert stage was an object lesson of what 
can be done by a brainy, talented American girl to bring 
herself to the very top, married a man of wealth and 
immediately and permanently retired from all public life. 
“For,” said she “I no longer need the money and there¬ 
fore. if I sing for money I am taking it away from 
those who need it more. If I sing for nothing I am ruin¬ 
ing the market for all professional singers and so here¬ 
after I will sing only vyhen the spirit prompts me to give 
a musicale at my own home where I can invite my 
personal friends merely as guests and where my singing 
becomes just a part of the entertainment I have to offer 
them”. In this attitude the singer was absolutely right 
and should be emulated by every one of talent and 
achievement whose circumstances are such that they do 
not wish to appear as/professionals. 

As for the student, no matter how promising he is and 
no matter how fine m37 seem his work, he should play 
only for studio affairs, small church concerts (of his own 
church), in the homes.of his personal friends or as co¬ 
worker in Music Study Clubs of which he is a member. 
He should not, under any circumstances, be allowed by 
his teacher to play at any sort of concert or entertain- 
ment where pay should.logically be given to a profession- 
al. Churches, lodges, societies of all kinds should insist 
upon professional attainment and should pay professional 
prices for all their entertainment; and, in those cases 
where they will not do so, every professional should 


utterly refuse any service and should thus leave them to 
acquire, painfully perhaps, a knowledge of the differ¬ 
ence between unguided student endeavor and that which 
can be supplied by the professional. 

There is far too prevalent an idea, even in the music 
studios and schools, that it is advantageous for the young, 
ster to appear occasionally (even if gratuitously) at the 
homes of the rich and before influential societies; “for,” 
they argue, “this gives both experience and extended ac¬ 
quaintance which will be useful later”. As for the ex¬ 
perience, it can be better attained in well regulated studio 
and home functions; and as for the “paying acquaint¬ 
ance” there is no fallacy under the sun so perverse and so 
absolute as to imagine its.possibility. Thousands of rich 
women (solo and en masse) will use the budding talent 
and development of the young musician to help while 
away an afternoon or evening; but, having done this, will 
have absolutely no thought of future paid service. 

“Why”, they will ask nonchalantly, “should we pay 
money now for that which was given us for nothing 
earlier even, in fact, in some cases, flung at our heads ?” 
And so, when the really big occasion, with pay, rolls 
around, they will invariably disappoint the young singer 
or player who has appeared before them for nothing and 
will give the engagement to an established professional. 

How Can One Make a Start 

“But how”, again is asked, “can one become profes¬ 
sional without making the appearances?” One almost 
loses patience in answering this absurd question; but 
two instances which may be cited will perhaps do it bet¬ 
ter than any long winded arguments. 

Amelita Galli-Curci, who is to-day making as much, if 
not more money than any artist singing in America, did 
not come to Chicago and offer herself to rich society 
women for nothing in the hope of “future pay engage¬ 
ments,” neither did she sing for Womens’ Clubs or 
Societies or in Benefit Concerts. Knowing that she had 
the voice, the preparation and the repertoire she went to 
Headquarters, the Grand Opera, and offered her wares. 
Her first appearance was at an adequate fee and this was 
followed immediately by a contract of unusual import. 
“But,” it may be argued, she had great talent.” That is 
very true; but, had she assumed anything less than the 
strictly professional attitude of appraising her own wares 
at a fair price, she might have wasted all her singing 
years in vain appeals to that very crowd of society women 
who would have heard her in their parlors for. nothing 
and afterward disdained her, but who now crowd any 
concert hall or opera house in which she may appear. 

For the second example the writer has in mind a young 
tenor who came to Chicago once and who, on advice, de¬ 
termined that his voice was the equivalent of money and 
that he would not dissipate its value by any free singing. 
He had not much backing or actual means and he knew 
that he had to study several years and also support his 
family; but, instead of currying favor from anybody he 
sang in cabaret for a salary and refused even church 
choir work except at rational pay. So soon as his in¬ 
tense study began to bear fruits he was offered one 
church position after another until he had reached the 
actual top in Chicago in the matter of pay and promi¬ 
nence and this was followed by engagements at the 
• Opera and one of the finest concert tours ever fulfilled 
by a young American artist. “I have never, absolutely 
never,” he declared to me, “sung for nothing; and if l 
had it all to do again, I would stick to the cabaret work 
all my life at a salary rather than ever attempt to gam 
prestige and curry favor through free appearances in so- 
called influential houses and before so-named powerful 
clubs and societies. These factors now buy me at a 
price if they want me; but, had they ever heard me with 
“nothing” printed on the tickets, they would not now 



































THE ETUDE 


Page 562 SEPTEMBER 1921 

These experiences may be made universal. AU free 
lessons may be suspended, and every bit°l ss 7onal 

may be eliminated from the schedule of th c Professional 
musician, if he will but teach the public carefully ^dif¬ 
ferences between non-professional classes an 
and if he will insist upon adequate pay for every public 
endeavor even if this entails eventually-Umons of ah 
classes of professional musicians in every city an 

^As^the exact moment when the student may step 
from that class into the professional, circumstances and 
individualism must determine. As stated earlier m t 
article, the real artist never ceases o be an earnest stu- 
dent; but, this does not mean at all that there ts 
time when the step from the one class to the othe 
should be definitely made. When the student has technic, 
repertoire, theoretical knowledge, interpretative mdcpend- 
ence and sufficient routine (gained m the home and the 
studio) and determined by graduation from * "liable 
college or certified by an absolutely goodteacher, he 
should assume to himself and announce to the world the 
fact that he is a professional musician and tliererfter 
should never allow any infringement of his rights or 
belittlement of his status. 


Teaching Table Exercises To Beginners 


No Missed Lessons 

By Mrs. H. B. Hudson 

At last I have solved the "missed lesson” problem, 

-to my own satisfaction, at least. I offer each pupil not 
absent from a lesson for eight consecutive weeks a 
prize, to be presented at a Parlor Musicale, when the 
parents and friends are present. . • 

This plan works like a charm, and is a loss ne ffier 
financially nor musically, as it results in more lessons, 
increased interest and better work. 

“The Wrong Thing” 

By E. M. Pierce 

In a story under the above title Kipling tells of an 
ambitious young ‘architect in the days ° f Henry 
Seventh, who won fame and was knighted by the king, 
vet felt no real satisfaction with his honors because he 
was aware that they came, not from the exoeHence °f 
his work, but because a suggestion he had made for 
some Jetty economy in the matter of an ornament for 
the bow of a ship had pleased the king s fancy^ 

Everyone likes to be praised, but the feeling is far 
sweeter if one can see that the praise is not only sincere 
but intelligently appreciative. Owing to the fact: that 
music is a somewhat elusive subject to be handled by 
words it is probable that musicians have to listen to 
more silly and inept remarks, even from the most well- 
meaning lips, than any other class of people. 

Some actual examples— . , . . k 

"Oh I am so fond of orchestral music—I love noth¬ 
ing better than to hear all the instruments tuning up 
and.getting ready!” Which remark sounds to a mm 
sician very much as if a guest at table should exclaim 
to the hostess, “Oh, I am so fond of eating-how 1 
would love to see your cook cleaning a fish 
"Really, my friends, you must not miss Mr. C s recital. 

I heard him last week, and he is simply wonderful- 
charming-he has just the loveliest brown <*«' 

The first of these gems of language was mcrhea d 
' in Champaign, Ill., the second in Ashv.lle, N. C. Bu 
people living in populous centers are by no means proof 
against equal absurdities. King Ludwig of Bavaria, 
that eccentric monarch who befriended Wagner so 
timefully, furnishes the most classical example. A 
certain great violinist-some say Rcm™y.-had been 
playing before the king, and naturally had exerted him¬ 
self to do his best. King Ludwig came forward to com¬ 
pliment him, and his face betokened that the violinist 
had made a most favorable impression. In my youth 
he began, “I heard Paganini , (the violinist bowed re¬ 
spectfully at the name of the great virtuoso). I also 
heard Spohr (another bow). “In later years I have 
greatly enpoyed listening to Joachim and Sarasate, both 
great ^artists, and yet so entirely different m sty e, are 
thev not?” (the violinist bowed respectful assent). _ It 
is interesting to compare the style of different artists. 
As I listened to you I compared you with Paganini, 
with Spohr, with Joachim, with Sarasate, and, would 
you believe it, none of them, none of them (violinist s 
heart beat violently-this is surely going to be some 
compliment), not one of them ever sweat the way 
you do!’’ 


“Do you advise teaching table exercises to beginners . 

Is it not better to give the child something to play at 
once, something which will satisfy his musical long¬ 
ing?”. This much mooted question appears regularly in 
the query columns of our various musical magazines. 

In answer there seems to be no consensus of opinion 
but the very fact that the question is asked would seem 
to me an indication that, underneath the teacher s ap¬ 
parent disinclination to include table work in the firs 
lessons, is a conscientious feeling that, after all, possi¬ 
ble b-nefit from their use might be realized. 

Many regard table exercises as dry and uninteresting 
to pupils and fear that to use them at the commence¬ 
ment of their music study would destroy their love ot 
the subject. On the other hand, I know that a bright, 
attractive teaching piece could be presented m such an 
indifferent way as not to appeal to the pupil at all. 'A 
great deal depends on the personality of the teacher. 
Fortunate, indeed, is the one who can take an appar¬ 
ently uninteresting phase of a subject and, with his own 
enthusiasm and magnetism, invest it with a charm which 
will hold the attention of the most apathetic pupil. It 
imagination is brought generously into play in connec¬ 
tion with this table work, the children will enjoy it. 1 
speak from experience. 

In hand shaping, the hand may be compared to a 
little house, the roof of which must not cave in (we 
would not care to have the roof of our home suddenly 
fall in, would we?) while the thumb, stretched out 
from the metacarpal or acting joint, forms a lovely 
rounded porch. The four remaining fingers are the 
pillars or supports for the roof, and of course these 
must be strong and firm and must not sink in at the 
shaping joints. The children will take great pride in 
fornrug these little houses at the table. 

Finger Action 

The next step will be finger action itself, the simple rais¬ 
ing and lowering of each flngei 
would not b 


Bach linger for eight counts. 

_ , „„„ „„..ittle pupil for growing weary 

Rather with a hearty voice and a bright smile, say some 
thing to this effect: “Bobby, what do you think—you cai 
never guess! Our little house has five elevators in it, am 
-" - way up to the roof garden, where 


By Mae-Aileen Erb 

enough t° Set the pencil^ "^^eTy''will promise to’ get 

head, 6 while^^imuimneo^rnly.^the fingers are receiving valu¬ 
able training. 

The teacher should be constantly alert, and, at the 
least sign of waning interest in the elevator story a 
new one must be ready. Possibly it will be about a 
regiment of soldiers; or, if two fingers are acting at 
the same time, a see-saw. The child, himself wdl 
become a prolific inventor of these stories, and the 
teacher’s problem is happily solved. 

Even should the child not practice these table exei- 
cises at home by himself, the weekly or bi-weekly drill 
under his instructor’s supervision will gradually make 
an impression on his mind, and he will form correct 
ideas of hand position and finger conditions. which he 
will apply consciously, or unconsciously, in his playing. 

Childhood is the ideal time to mold the soft, pliable 
hands and fingers in the way they should grow. Why wait 
until the bones become stiff and unmanageable, and the 
poor little straightened fingers lapse into habits of sunken 
joints, so hard to overcome? They then are indeed con¬ 
fronted with a task so difficnlt that there is no doubt of 
table exercises being disliked. It is so much easier to learn 
to play correctly from the start. 

. If a child craves sweets and clamors for his dessert, 
will the judicious parent heed his cry and give it to him 
before the substantial muscle-building food is eaten; 
If indulged, the child’s physical condition, in time, 
would become undermined and he would stand im 
favorable comparison with his sturdy, robust play¬ 
mates. The analogy between this and the poorly taught 
pupil in contrast with the one carefully trained is obvi¬ 
ous. It was only last summer that an intelligent little 
girl of eleven exclaimed in high glee: “Just think, my 
teacher has given me a piece full of ovtaves, and I’ve 
taken lessons only three months!” That child, possi¬ 
bly quite talented, may never rise -above mediocrity, 
and will not likely realize the reason until, perhaps, ii 
[ is too late. 


tney an go way up iu u 
wonderful view of the pai 
river running through if 

— to the roof to see t 
kept busy. Suppose 


and v 




c hav 


Duntry, i 




a lot o 
r eleva 


te them 
3 rs will 


article v 


thumb). Now, 
up the passengers, 
moderate flow of 
seeing. This one 
this elevator we < 
When we cc— i - 
pity, this o 


slowly 

Through* 


concentrate on umu 6 me * 
pencil under it and tell him 
very, very hard, perhaps he 


with the largest u ,.,. . 

end carefully we can carry 
it the exercise keep up a 
is to what the guests are 
nes t in a tree top; from 
see the mountains in the distance. 
' fourth finger—“Oh, is it not a 

---high as the others. 

Bobby will at once 

’■ weekf if he tries 
it high 


est answer to the question at the beginning 
could be to compare the little pupil who. hi: 

_ of everything except note reading, plays wi 

tened fingers, sunken joints, and fifth finger spread < 
length of the key,, with the child who, when playing, 
“ ' 'n miniature. The 1 


, au mdst in miniature. The latter s ham 
supple, his fingers rightly curved, and the 
--ombination so thoroughly trained as 




ana arm commune: 
tonal effects which 
re i. a fact tlu ‘ 
•e thoroui 


„ _ [ilijycr could justly 

nuu mi deeper one delves into a subject 
•oughly one understands it. the keener i 
•ived from its study. Hence. I feel sure 




enjoyment ueriveu irom us si 
were we to question the two 
the more, there would be no ui 
would claim the greater share. 


A Practical Bill Head for Music Teachers 


Cstljer C. JBeuScm 

PIANO INSTRUCTION AND HARMONY 


Pupil — 


Lessons 

13 14 15 16 V 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 




GRADE FOR THE MONTH 

CAN BE IMPROVED 

Excellent 


Time 


Good 


Fingering 


Passing 


Studies 


Poor 


Pieces 


EFFORT 


Harmony 



Faithfulness to lesson appointments is positively required. 
No exceptions can be made. 


The music teacher's stationery, makes a decided impression upon patrons. It will pay any r 
with the best by conferring with his publisher who usually hes a varied stock of such material 


:o keep abreasl 


SEPTEMBER 1921 . Page 563 

THE ETUDE _ _ _ 


1 

||||||^ 




Practical Ideas on Artistic Pedaling 


WWm 

r 

if .. Hi! ; ::i i 

By the Famous Virtuoso 

1 

i IIP I 

JOSEF HOFMANN 


- 

( Editor’s Note : The following article is one of the chapters in “ Piano Playing With Piano ***** 

Josef Hofmann and is herewith produced for the benefit of Etude readers, by Passion Students who desire practical 
material for Pedal Study will find excellent opportunities in the Pedal Book by ]. M. Blose.) 







though audible, must die of their own weakness, and 
while the strong, ruling chord was constantly disturbed 
by the weaker ones it also re-established its supremacy 
with the death of every weaker one which it outlasted. 
This use of the pedal has its limitations in the evanescent 
nature of the tone of the piano. That moment when the 
blending of non-harmonic tones imperils the tonal beauty 
of the piece in hand can be determined solely and ex¬ 
clusively by the player’s own ear, and here we are once 
more at the point from which this article started, 
namely: that the ear is governor, and that it alone can 
decide whether or not there is to be any pedal. 

It were absurd to assume that we can greatly please 
the ear of others by our playing so long as our own ear 
is not completely satisfied. We should, therefore, en¬ 
deavour to train the susceptibility of our ear, and we 
should ever make it more difficult to gain the assent of 
our own ear than to gain that of our auditors. They 
may, apparently, not notice defects in your playing, but 
at this juncture I wish to say a word of serious warning: 
Do not confound unmindfulness with consent! To hear 
ourselves play—that is, to listen to our own playing— 
is the bed-rock basis of all music-making and also, of 
course, of the technic of the pedal. Therefore, listen 
carefully, attentively to the tones you produce. When 
you employ the pedal as a prolongation of the fingers 
(to sustain tones beyond the reach of the fingers), see 
to it that you catch, and hold, the fundamental tone of 
your chord, for this tone must be al.ways your chief 
consideration. 

Whether you use the pedal as a means of mere pro¬ 
longation or as a medium of colouring, under no cir- 


'iotogra/’h by Byron 

Incorrect Position of the Feet 


To speak in a concrete manner of the pedal is possible 
only on the basis of a complete understanding of the 
fundamental principle underlying its use. The reader 
must agree to the governing theory that, the organ 
which governs the employment of the pedal is—the ear! 
As the eye guides the fingers when we read music, so 
must the ear be the guide—and the “sole” guide—of the 
foot upon tthe pedal. The foot is merely the servant, 
the executive agent, while the ear is the guide, the 
judge and the final criterion. If there .is any phrase in 
piano-playing where we should remember particularly 
that music is for the ear it is in the treatment of the 
pedal. Hence, whatever is said here in the following 
lines with regard to the pedal must be understood as 
resting upon the basis of this principle. 

The General Rule 

As a general rule I recommend pressing the lever or 
treadle down with a quick, definite, full motion and 
always immediately after—mark me, after—the striking 
of the keys, never simultaneously with the stroke of the 
fingers, as so many erroneously assume and do. To 
prevent a cacophonous mixture of tones we should con¬ 
sider that we must stop the old tone before we can give 
pedal to the new one, and that, in order to make the 
stopping of the past tone perfect, we must allow the 
damper to press upon the vibrating strings long enough 
to do its work. If, however, we tread down exactly with 
the finger-stroke we simply inhibit this stopping, because 
the damper in question is lifted again before it has had 
time to fall down. (In speaking of the dampers as 
moving up and down I have in mind the action of the 
“grand ” piano; in the upright piano the word “off” 


must be substituted for "up,” and “on’’ for 
“down.”) This rule will work in a vast majority of 
cases, but like every rule—especially in art—it will be 
found to admit of many exceptions. 

Harmonic Clarity 

Harmonic Clarity in Pedaling is the basis, but it is 
only the basis; it is not all that constitutes an artistic 
treatment of the pedal. In spite of what I have just 
said above there are in many pieces moments where a 
blending of tones seemingly foreign to one another, is a 
means of characterization. This blending is especially 
permissible when the passing (foreign) tones are more 
than one octave removed from the lowest tone and from 
the harmony built upon it. In this connection it should 
be remembered that the pedal is not merely a means of 
tone prolongation but also a means of coloring—and 
pre-eminently that. What is generally understood by 
the term piano-charm is to the greatest extent produced 
by an artistic use of the pedal. 

Accent Effects 

For instance, great accent effects can be produced 
by the gradual accumulating of tone-volume through the 
pedal and its sudden release on the accented point. The 
effect is somwhat like that which we hear in the orches¬ 
tra when a crescendo is supported by a roll of the drum 
or tympani making the last tap on the accented point. 
And, as I am mentioning the orchestra, I may illustrate 
by the French horns another use of the pedal; where 
the horns do not carry the melody (which they do 
relatively seldom) they are employed to support sustained 
harmonies, and their effect is like a glazing, a binding, a 
unifying of various tone-colors of the other 
instruments. Just such a glazing is produced 
by the judicious use of the pedal, and when, 
in the orchestra, the horns cease and the 
strings proceed alone there ensues a certain 
soberness of tone which we produce in the 
piano by the release and the non-use of the 
pedal. In the former instance, while the 
horns were active they furnished the har¬ 
monic back-ground upon which the thematic 
development of the music 1 1 picture pro¬ 
ceeded ; in the latter case, when the horns 
cease the back-ground is taken away and 
the thematic configurations stand out—so to 
speak—against the sky. Hence, the pedal 
gives to the piano tone that unifying, glazing, 
that finish—though this is not exactly the 
word here—which the horns or softly played 
trombones give to the'orchestra. 








Correct Position of the Feet on the Pedal 


Mixing Harmonic Tones 

But the pedal can do more than that. At 
times we can produce strange, glasslike 
effects by purposely mixing non-harmonic 
tones. I only need to hint at some of the 
fine, embroidery-like cadenzas in Chopin’s 
works, like the one in his E-minor Concerto 
(Andante, measures 101, 102, 103). Such 
blendings are productive of a multitude of 
effects, especially when we add the agency 
of dynamic graduation: effects suggestive of 
winds from Zephyr to Boreas, of the splash 
and roar of waves, of fountain-play, of rust¬ 
ling leaves, etc. This mode of blending can 
be extended also to entire harmonies in many 
cases where one fundamental chord is to pre¬ 
dominate for some time while other chords 
may pass in quicker succession while it lasts. 
In such cases it is by no means imperative to 
abandon the pedal; we need only to establish 
various dynamic levels and place the ruling 
harmony on a higher level than the passing 
ones. In other words, the predominating 
chord must receive so much force that it 
canoutlast all those briefer ones which, 











































































THE ETUDE 


Page 56), . SEPTEMBER 1921 

cumstances use it as-a cloak for imperfection of execu¬ 
tion For. like charity, it is apt to be made to cover a 
multitude of sins; but, again like charity, who wants to 
make himself dependent upon it, when honest work can 
prevent it? 

A Mistaken Use 

Nor should the pedal be used to make up for the defici¬ 
ency of force. To produce a forte is the business of the 
fingers (with or without the aid of the arm) but not ot 
the pedal, and this holds true also-m«tatw mutandis-oi 
the left pedal for which the Germans use the word (Ver- 
schiebung) denoting something like “shifting. In a 
“grand” piano the treading of the left pedal shifts the 
hammers so far to one side that instead of striking 
three strings they will strike only two. (In the pianos 
of fifty and more years ago there were only two strings 
to each tone, and when the hammers were shifted by the 
treading of the left pedal they struck only one string. 
From those days we have retained the term ‘urn corda 
—one string.) In an upright piano the lessening ot tone- 
volume is produced by a lessening of the momentum of 
the hammer stroke. 

Now as the right pedal should not be used to cover 
a lack of force, so should the left pedal not be regarded 
as a license to neglect the formation of a fine pianissimo 
touch. It should not cloak or screen a defective pianissi¬ 
mo but should serve exclusively as a means of coloring 
where the softness of tone is coupled with what the 
jewellers call “dull finish.” For the left pedal does not 
soften the tone without changing its character; it lessens 
the quantity of tone but at the same time it also mark¬ 
edly affects the quality. 

To Sum Up: Train your ear and then use both pedals 

honestly! Use them for what they were made. Remem 

ber that even screens are not used for hiding things behind 
them, but for decorative purposes or for protection. 
Those who do use them for hiding something must have 
something which they prefer to hide! 


Counting for a Star 

By Ethel V. Moyer 

The “Gold Star” plan is most useful for accomplish¬ 
ing many good results in the way of memorizing, scale 
practice and working out special difficulties. 

A mother recently told me that counting aloud was 
the very most objectionable thing her little girl had to do. 

At her next lesson I told her of the extreme import¬ 
ance of counting aloud; how it was necessary in order 
that she might hear if she were getting her counts 
even I said, “Now I am going to write count aloud in 
big letters in your lesson book every week for a long 
time If I do not have to remind you about it often i 
shall give you one of my big gold stars each week until 
you have learned to do it very well.” 

The little girl may have worked for the gold star 
more than for the good effect it had on her playing, but, 
be that as it may, the results were very satisfactory. 


Thumb on the Black Keys 

By Frederic W. Burry 

Among the little problems that come to the piano stu¬ 
dent is the right and proper time of putting the thumb 
on the black keys. , , , 

In olden days it used to be taught that the thumb 
should never be used on the black keys Surely this was 
meant to be taken with a grain of salt, for there are 
times when a facile execution is best accomplished by 

^AUral^have'exceptions, and the general rule about 
using the thumb on the black keys is to do so only when 
necessary. A 

“When does it become necessary? is aked. 

Here again each one is required to use his own good 
judgment.. As pianoforte technic develops, the thumb 
becomes capable of special manipulation. It is strong 
but its energy can be conserved. Thus it: may be utilized 
for sforzando affect; or its touch may be light. 

So as with other matters, beware of a too rigid regula¬ 
tion ’ The greater variety of fingering the better, with 
an every-day standard for general purposes. With mod¬ 
ern music a certain ultra-technic is often demanded. 
The limits of keyboard and strings are toed to the 
utmost. New and newer effects are introduced; and just 
as our piano is very different from the old-fashioned toy 
with which the early masters had to content themselves, 
so must we invent new means of handling it. 

Meanwhile, the thumb must move with care. It must 
not be reckless among the Black. Keys. 


Music and the Student’s Health 

By Charles W. Landon 


Music study is often charged as a cause for t le 
nervous breakdown of school girls. As a matter of fact, 
late hours, a giddy social life and oyer-indulgence in no 
nutritious and indigestible confectionary is more often 

^ A reasonable amount of practice, under the S u j dance 
a good teacher, is something of a recreation and a relief 
from the routine of school work.. It appealsto' 
different faculties of mind. It is more al ^ m 
spiritual nature, is more esthetical, and appeals more t 
the love of the beautiful. 

Parents would do well to ponder these matters. The 
summer is too short and too much filled with vacational 
diversions to furnish an opportunity for an adequate 
mastery of a subject of so much importance in the 
modern scheme of education. Better a curtailing of 
some of the social activities during the school year than 


that their sons and daughters lose this valuable time for 
the proper balance in their education. | 

Those years known as “The High School Age are 
the very ones in which character formation is the most 
ac ive in “ung life. Music is one of the most valuable 

S» fa to ,rffa»«t -d eni,h rf. 

To wait till school is finished, is too late, l ew, ex 
cepting those discovering that they have unusual voices, 
"folk. »p .he study Of music 

The child who loves music, brings it into play, and has 
a mind of average maturity, should beginSessions a six 
or seven years of age. Otherwise, it probably would be 
better to wait till a little later. But let them begin 
early so that their accomplishments may become a i art 
of the home life to bring enjoyment into the days ot 
those who have sacrificed in order that the advantage 
may be theirs. 


One Minute 

My language is understood all over the world 
Genius begins work; but it is industry which fin- 

^Tffiffree arts and the beautiful science ofcomposi- 
tion do not admit of any fetters of handicraft. Heart 
and soul must be free. _ , 

To Mozart’s father :-“I declare to you, before God, 


With Haydn . •. 

and on the faith of an honest man that your son is the 
greatest composer that ever lived.” 

When I had caught an idea, my whole endeavor was 
to work it out, to develop and sustain it according to 
the rules of art. Thus I proceeded; and it is just this 
procedure in which many of our modern composers 
are deficient. 


Wise Selection of Piano Teaching Material 

By Joseph George Jacobson 


lx is impossible to state that in this and that grade 
certain studies and pieces should be practiced. For 
many reasons, neither pieces nor studies can be classi¬ 
fied in such a manner. Some pupils possess an octave 
technic far in advance of their finger-dexterity, and 
vice versa. Then, too, many pieces have a few meas¬ 
ures which are more difficult by many grades than the 
rest of the piece. For example, Rubinstein’s Romance 
in E Flat could be played easily by a third or fourth 
grade pupil if it were not for the triplet-figure m the 
middle of the piece. Let us see what is best t° follow 
from the time the aspirant to future fame takes his first 
lesson until he appears on the public concert-platform. 

At the very beginning it is wise to follow a modern 
piano-method, as for example The New Beginners 
Book The Sartorio Piano Method, etc. In connec¬ 
tion with this, play duets with the pupils in which the 
teacher’s parts are more difficult than those of the 
pupil, such as the Low Duets or the Sartorio Duets. 

Don’t Skimp Scales 

Do not rush the teaching of the scales too fast. T 
met a young pupil recently who had skimmed through 
all the major and minor scales during nine months of 
study, sans raison et sans plaisir, with the result that 
he knew nothing. Five or six major scales during the 
first year will be ample. This Would include thumb 
exercises, arpeggios, broken chords and. some wrist 
exercises. It is wise to have the pupil write the scales 
and wiser if the teacher has a deep and thorough 
knowledge of the scales. If not quite sure I could 
recomend no better book than Mastering the Scales and 
Arpeggios. 

Study Czerny 

After the first rudiments of piano-playing have been 
mastered the future piano-technic can be summed up 
in these two words: CZERNY and CHOPIN. Czerny’s 
technical exercises make a foundation for almost the 
whole piano-literature, including even Rubinstein and 
Li.zt. All others—just to mention a few—Dussek, 
Kohler, Bertini, Diabelli, Herz, Moscheles, and even 
dementi with his much-overrated Gradus ad Parnassum 

_ are more or less weak imitators of the Czemv-tech- 

nic. Such works, with the exception of Cramer’s 
Selected Studies, edited by von Billow, can be safely 
placed on the shelf and left there. Study Czerny—of 
course not everything he has written. His last Opus 
number was 848! The only thing that saved us from 
more, and the only reason he laid aside his indefatig¬ 
able pen, was that he expired in the midst of his labors. 
His industry was truly astounding. It is said that he 
could write on three or four compositions at the same' 
time, not wishing to lose time by waiting for the sheets 
to dry. If you are not able to make your own judicious 


selections use the three volumes of Czerny-Liebling. in 
vhich. the famous Liszt pupil, Emil Liebling, selected 
the best studies from those of Liszt’s teacher, Czerm 
Do not assign one study until the previous one lias 
been well mastered. Aim for more quality than quan¬ 
tity. The use of the metronome is advisable. You will 
find the metronome-markings in Czerny, however, usu¬ 
ally too fast. When the pupil has mastered these three 
volumes of remarkably varied studies he has already 
solved technical problems of advanced and complicated 
character in true virtuoso style. Then, study the Toc¬ 
cata, Opus 92, dealing with thirds and sixths, which is 
of much more importance than Clement’s B Plat Major 
Toccata. After this by all means study hard and assidu¬ 
ously Czerny’s Opus 337, the forty daily exercises. 
These will lead you ahead, slowly and surely, to the 
summit. After this, to crown the height, Brahms Liszt 
and Rubinstein. Of course it is necessary to play 
octave-studies, as for example Low and Kullak Studies 
and many others. If you are one of those, win think 
that there is no melody in Bach, which reminds me of 
the man who could not see the forest because there 
were too many trees, practice him for technical pur¬ 
poses. 


What to study of Chopin ? Everything! When you 
have the privilege of studying the twenty-four studies 
go to this task with reverence, for you are practising 
tone-pcems of exquisite beauty which not alone are of 
extreme technical value through their novel extensions 
and poly-rhythmical innovations, but which will develop 
the artistic musical soul if you possess such a thing. 
Remember a genius wrote them, and Schumann said of 
the composer, “Gentleman, hats off 1—a genius 1” You 
can never play Chopin well enough, nor make perfectly 
eloquent the unsurpassed lyric character of the melodie 
spirit of this great composer. 

What after Chopin? I think Chopin-Godowsky. 
Whatever is being said for or against the musical value 
of these undoubtedly clever arrangements, it is sure 
that they will help technic in a wonderful manner. 
They seem to be a necessity for the modern pianist, 
though many make light of them because they cannot 
play them. They are true Chopin. His spirit is there. 
You will lose no time by studying them. 

Isidor Philipp has published splendid technical ma¬ 
terial. His latest work, Finger Gymnastics. Op- 60, 
is extremely clever. If you find time to practice twenty- 
five hours a day and play through all these you win 
acquire a great technic or die in the attempt! Trie 
secret of it all is that many seem to lie able to con¬ 
centrate the value of twenty-five hours’ practice into two 
or three. That perhaps is the planistic genius that con¬ 
quers all obstacles. 


tiie etude 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 565 



The Piano Teacher and His Success 

By CONSTANTIN VON STERNBERG 




Every lawyer, clergyman and physician, in fact every 
man or woman of any profession whatever, discovers 
sooner or later that the notions held by the general public 
with regard to the ethics of his or her profession are 
funny, often painfully funny. With only too few ex¬ 
ceptions, the laity does not in the least differentiate be¬ 
tween the professions and commerce. Accustomed to be 
served in a store with whatever they choose to ask, 
whether it be good for them or not (so long as it is 
within the law), they seem to expect a similar mercantile 
complaisance from professional people, never so much as 
suspecting that a professional person has not devoted 
years of study and preparation merely to give his patrons 
what they ask for, but rather to give them what they 

”*a’ lawyer listens to the story of his client and finds 
that the right of the case is all on the other side. As an 
honest man (and there are such among that much abused 
profession) he advises his client to abstain from a law¬ 
suit, to compromise; and for this advice he charges a 
fee, as is right and proper, though he did not go to court. 
Yet there are people who object to this fee because “he 
didn’t do nothin’.” That his honest and well-weighed 
advice saves them the useless expense of an unsuccessful 
litigation and prevents them from possibly damaging 
their good names—that, they forget. 

What must a clergyman suffer when a committee of 
elders or deacons waits upon him with the notion that 
his calling begins and ends in the pulpit, and that, when 
there, he should preach about the biblical text and abstain 
from discussing questions of every-day life or public 
welfare; just as if religion were only for the church 
and the church only for religion. 

Still more numerous are those who think that a 
physician studies to cure all diseases, when in reality he 
can only learn to know and recognise their nature and 
to cure them only if they are curable (provided the 
patient obeys his orders), while in incurable cases he is 
satisfied to afford relief from acute suffering. Artist 
painters, sculptors and architects stand in holy dread of 
the man who says: “I don’t know the first thmg about 
Art, but I know what I like!” “So does my dog,’ was 
the reply of my friend to one of that, alas ubiquitous 

Now, musicians suffer perhaps less on this score than 
the followers of any other profession; but we must re¬ 
flect that the queer notions we have to combat, if a trifle 
less preposterous, are surely larger in number. Volumes 
could be filled with their recital. And among musical 
instructors there is none whose sufferings under these 
notions equals that of the piano teacher. 

People say, “If the vocal teacher can make my daugh¬ 
ter sing, and the violin teacher can make her play the 
violin, why can’t the piano teacher make her play the 
piano?” It never enters their- minds that the vocal 
teacher will not teach her unless she has a _voice; that the 
violin teacher expects a certain something which tor 
want of a better term has been called “string-sense. 
But the piano teacher is not expected to attach any con¬ 
ditions to the promise of success. “Here is the girl, 
now make her play.” 

The reason for this injustice lies in the circumstance 
that it is next to impossible to teach the piano without 
instructing the pupil at the same time in music; I mean 
music, not so much in a theoretical as rather in an 
esthetic sense. I am sure that my brothers and sisters 
of the voice and the strings will have the good grace to 
admit that in their branches of instruction this impos¬ 
sibility is not nearly as absolute. On the piano the use 
of the pedal alone requires the development of a faculty 
in the pupil with which they have no concern at all; it 
is connected with the perception of purity ot clarity of 
harmony, as distinct from purity of mere pitch. 

As a matter of usage the very word music teacher has 
acquired the meaning of piano teacher; and, if this usage 
has originated with the untutored, their instinct has led 
them quite rightly. For, of all musical instructors, the 


piano teacher has by far the best apparatus for convey¬ 
ing a general and esthetic knowledge of music. The 
nature of the instrument, giving room for melody, bass 
and middle voices simultaneously, assists him. The nota¬ 
tion, on two (and sometimes even three) staffs, trains 
the’pupil’s eye to encompass not mere successions of 
notes but also their concurrence and relation to each 
other • to read not horizontally only, but also vertically. 
The pupil must learn early to distinguish between es¬ 
sentials and auxiliaries. The literature of the piano, 
more than that of any other instrument, trains him early 
in the appreciation of polyphonic music. (The ergan 
might have been excepted, but it is too closely related to 
the piano and, besides, too limited in its emotional scope, 
or should be so in compliance with the spirit and decorum 
of its customary place.) What is more, the piano can be 
an effective agent in making people musical in the sense 
of making them understand what they hear played or 
sung, and it can do this at a comparatively early stage of 

StUdy " The Ethics of the Piano Teacher 

All this being so, however, must needs produce a slight 
difference between the ethics of the piano teacher and ot 
other musical instructors. The vocal teacher has little 
difficulty in deciding: “Voice—lessons; no voice—no 
lessons 1” But the piano teacher, with every new pupil 
that comes to him, is confronted by a whole array ot 
problems. , , , 

What sort of pupil might this newcomer be? What 
sort of folk are his parents? What do they expect. 
Do they purpose a half dozen well drilled show pieces, 
and that’s all? Do they wish their child to become mu¬ 
sical in a general sense and leave it to the teacher to find 
out whether it is to become pre-eminently a player, or a 
fine connoisseur, appreciator, absorber of good music 
(by far the more enviable of the two) or a so-called 
social “utility,” a good reader who can help out occa¬ 
sionally with an accomnaniment or in a duet, or whether 
it should turn out to become—heaven help us—a com- 

Perplexing questions, to be sure, but the piano teacher 
gets soon enough accustomed to facing them. There is 
one problem, however, which with every recurrence re¬ 
news the uncertainty of his own conscience. He asks 
himself, “Shall I tell these parents that their expectation 
of a half dozen show pieces is shoddy, vulgar? Shall I 
tell them that their boy’s base-ball hardened hands (not 
to mention the thickness of the calloused fingers) hardly 
promise a fine executant? Shall I, by telling them so, 
deprive the boy of the delights and the fine, influence 
which the appreciation of good music will bring to his 
mind and heart? Shall I at once disillusionize them 
let them go to another teacher—which that type ot 
people are certain to do—and to a possibly less con¬ 
scientious one or to a charlatan, who will, promise any 
old thing and take their money without giving them any 
return?” 

Perplexing Questions Solved 

Of course the piano teacher needs time to solve, this 
complex problem of conscience. He must get acquainted 
with his pupil; must, through him judge, the parents and 
the nature of their influence upon the child; must gradu¬ 
ally find out the direction of the pupil’s natural bent and 
all that. But, alas, he is expected to attach no conditions 
to his promises and to make them after a half hour , of 
examination. Sometimes the parents do not even bring 
the child with them, but expect the piano teacher to judge 
in absentia, or from a written list of pieces or studies 
which the dear child has played “real nice.” ^ As one. good 
lady put it: “Don’t I know my own child?” But it evi¬ 
dently never occurred to her that the familiarity with 
her child did not make her a judge of the dear child s 
piano playing. . . 

Now, these aforesaid problems are not fictitious. 
Every honest piano teacher knows them and most of us 
have probably, while grappling with them, resorted to 


what the sailors call “tacking.” We have reached for 
a happy medium which gave the best satisfaciton all 
around; which should soon teach the child that its par¬ 
ents are well meaning but in error, and by which it still 
could please them, while possibly, in an indirect way, it 
cotlld also educate them to understand or like a better 
class of music and to take a higher view of the purpose 
of its study. 

I think that in the solution of this conscience problem 
lies his success. Taking his professional knowledge for 
granted, the aforesaid problems are a test of his tact. 
The actual knowledge among piano teachers is, thanks 
to schools, conservatories and academies, pretty nearly 
alike. At best the differences cannot amount to much. But 
what we do with the knowledge, how we use, how we 
apply, what we observe through it or what we fail to 
notice, that is here we differ. As to the actual informa¬ 
tion or knowledge, it is with music very much as with 
medicine. If a new remedy for, or a new treatment of, 
a certain disease is discovered to-day, though it be in 
Melbourne or Petrograd, it is known to every decent 
physician in the world by to-morrow. But tr.r diagnosis, 
ah yes, the diagnosis—that is the point! It is in the 
power of diagnosing where physicians differ mainly from 
each other, and that power or quality is still open to 
debate as to whether, in its highest degree, it can be 
acquired by learning, or whether it is a specific gift of 
nature to the mind, a matter of intuition as it were. At 
any rate it discloses the tact of the medical mind. Tact 
governing knowledge. 

Just so it is the tact of the piano teacher’s musical 
mind which, after receiving certain impressions from the 
new applicant, must analyze, assort, sift them and finally 
determine upon that course or attitude towards the 
parents by which he can do he most good to their child. 

Brilliant Players 

The public is perhaps excusable for considering that 
particular teacher of their city to be the best one who 
can show the largest percentage of brilliant players 
a mnn g his pupils. In many cases he is the best, but by 
far not in all cases, for very, often he. is only a good 
mechanical drillmaster, possessing a rudimentary knowl¬ 
edge of music and developing his trusting pupils into 
nothing better than shallow, egotistical., parrotlike re¬ 
peaters of a number of pieces—living pianolas—without 
enab ling- them to study anything by themselves. Men 
like the late Leschetizky cannot come under this cate¬ 
gory; they are differentdy situated. To them comes only 
that type of pupils who are bent upon playing and noth¬ 
ing else, and who are mostly, if not pretty good players, 
at any rate pretty well grounded musicians before they 
come to him. As to the regular run of music (piano) 
teachers, their value to their musical community lies not 
in producing the largest number, but the most musicianly 
players, whether they play easy or difficult pieces. The 
musical influence is what constitutes the music teacher’s 
value, an influence to which the limits of his city are no 
barriers, but which may extend to the whole county, the 
State, country or the whole world. 

It will be difficult to find any single criterion by which 
to determine a piano teacher’s success; but it can be 
done by putting several tests together, and two. such 
measurings which have been stated in former discus¬ 
sions of kindred subjects are recalled, viz.; 

A teacher’s success is disclosed by what his 
pupils can learn or study by themselves when 
they leave him after a reasonable time, and 
by the percentage of his pupils who, while 
studying with him, attend good concerts. 

By staying away from good concerts they passively 
oppose and harm the cause of good music. By attending 
them, in a body they help to encourage the visits of good 
artists in their city. This elevates the standard of ap¬ 
preciation in the community, stimulate the interest in 
good music, and hence serves the cause of good music, 
not to mention that it provides a much needed mus'eal 








































THE ETUDE 


Page 566 SEPTEMBER 1921 

nourishment for their own teacher, who cannot keep on 
giving out musical thought year after year without ever 
taking any in. This criterion is therefore, while not in¬ 
fallible, a fairly certain one, because it proves first ot 
all that, however much his pupils may be engrossed m 
their own little selves, he taught them to love music 


Starting the Fire 

By Edward Ellsworth Hipsher 

Enthusiasm is the fire that warms the student to his 
work. Enthusiasm is the motive power that leads him 
on to mastery of it. The ability to inspire and develop 
this in the pupil is the open gate to success for the am¬ 
bitious teacher. ., 

Enthusiam in the young arises whenever they feel that 
the thing to be done is one really worth the while; that 
out of it they are to derive a definite gratification; in 
fact, when the accomplishing of the thing creates in 
itself a pleasurable sensation. Establishing such a con- 
dition and maintaining it is the happy privilege of the 
teacher. Happy, because no work ever will evolve more 
lasting or more precious results than that which brings 
uplifting enjoyment into the lives of others. 

To do this, the very first thing necessary to the teacher 
is that he have within himself unbounded enthusiasm tor 
his work. He must love it so much that his efforts spent 
towards achieving success are the greatest joys of his 
life. To study late into the night must mean nothing 
less than a delight in the satisfaction of mastering the 
thing that will make it possible to do his work better. 
Till his soul glows with the fervor of this ambition, he 
is not ready for his labor. . . 

Sympathy and satisfaction with .the buoyant spirit ot 
youth there must be. Years will come; but youth must 
not decay in the soul of the teacher. Many applicants 
will be scarcely students as yet. To make them such is 
the reason for the teacher. It is that which has brought 
them. Will you enter so into their lives and ideals that 
they will feel that they can come expecting a sympathetic 
response? Ah, yes, you say, the teacher is there to 
form ideals, not to have ideals thrust upon him. All 
very true. And it is just as true that she must be led. 
And—right softly—the leading is just a little more neces¬ 
sary when the pupil happens to be a he. The measure of , 
your doing so limits success or failure. 

Is there under your left ribs a little of that spirit that 
heartens youth and bids dull care away ? Can you for the 
time forget that you are necessarily a “high profession¬ 
al?” Can you not take hold of that exuberance that will 
enable you to get down (or up) to the spirit of youth and 
prance with them through their early life? Then, can 
you carry this into the studio and allow it to permeate 
the lesson periods so that they become seasons of really 
intimate, quickening communion between yourself and the 
pupil? , . . , . 

No, the teacher is in no danger of losing the respect 
of the pupil. Not if. of the right sort. Is your quality 
of mind and training so inferior that you have to hide 
behind a flimsy curtain of assumed superiority ? Is there 
not a deeper ring to your life than that? Did ever you 
meet closely one of the really great, one who stands out 
in the world because of genuine wealth of character, 
intellect and heart? Then the chances are that you came 
into contact with one of the simplest natures of all your 
experience. No airs there. Just the simplicity of sin¬ 
cerity in a noble purpose. . n . 

To plead the necessity of “making an impression is 
to acknowledge modiocrity. Forget the airs! They be¬ 
come really amusing to the knowing ones, when you are 
thrown in contrast with the truly superior nature. Get 
into the spirit of real enjoyment of your work. Enrich 
your own nature till those who come in contact with you 
feel that it is good to be there. Do not waste your 
precious time in worrying about whether they are to be 
sufficiently subdued to an attitude of respect. Better 
worry as to whether you are worthy of it! Genuine 
merit so seldom fails of recognition that your chances 
of neglect from this cause are inconsiderable. 

Forget about self. Become so interested in the ad¬ 
vancement of the scholar that he feels it. Yes, you 
need not tell him “how very much you are interested in 
his success.” He had that sized up long before you 
thought of telling him. He knew how genuine was 
your interest. How sagacious is his intuition ! You could 
not hide this from him, how hard so-ever you might try. 
It would be “sticking out” so plainly that the blind pupil 
would bump into it. And this, as surely, will react upon 
his studies. Yes, enthusiasm, let it once get into the 
teacher’s system, is contagious as the mumps. If the 
most of your pupils have not a well developed case of it, 
go look yourself over for symptoms. You may need a 
good, wholesome inoculation. 


The Essence of Musical Memorizing 

By William and Carrie Eylau 


(Editor’s NoT E :-The following article is by two well- 
known pedagogical experts, who for many years made a 
specialty of teaching the philosophy of music study. In 
their work The Profession of Music Teaching from 
which the following is taken, they have introduced ideas 
which have been enthusiastically endorsed by leading 
European critics. The translation is by Miss Florence 
Ellenwood Allen.) 

Memorizing is now universally regarded as a part of 
the technical mastery of a piece. We leave undiscussed 
the question as to whether it is absolutely necessary to 
mar so many concert-performances up to about fifty 
percent of their value, by forsaking our notes. We have 
to do with the fact that, from the outlook of today, 
playing, from memory is to be recommended in public 
appearance. The fact is that every piece over which we 
really have technical mastery is so thoroughly controlled, 
mentally and physically, that the use of notes during 
public performance would have only a quieting influence, 
and thus might often save a whole career. 

Many think learning by heart to be an insuperable 
difficulty. Music-students hold mournful assemblages 
with one another, or importune their colleagues, sup¬ 
posed to have “good memories,” to tell them “how they 
got it;” and most of them learn that the people with 
good memories don’t themselves know how they “got 

.Where are our musical memories situated? “In the 
head, naturally.” 

If I want to learn a language, for example, what are 
the means which lead to the memory? “Eye and ear. 

Why the ear? “Because it grasps and holds the 
single sounds as well as the rise and fall of the construc¬ 
tion of sentences.” . . 

What task, then, has the ear before it when it is a ques¬ 
tion of real music? “To grasp and hold the tones, the 
tone-groups, the tone-colors, and the rhythm. 

What has the eye to do with the learning of a lan¬ 
guage? “It stamps on our mind the image of the single 

Can I not make a musical application of this power? 
“Yes, as far as the eye gives us a pictorial image of the 
chord or run which the ear hears, and does it in just the 
same way as it draws the picture of a word in our 
memories.” 

Have we not developed still another sense which builds 
a bridge to the musical memory? “Perhaps the key- 
board-sense ?” 

Not perhaps, but certainly! In what have we espe¬ 
cially developed it? “In study of common technic, in 
study of the character of tone, and in all the special 
difficulties of compositions.” 

How have we trained the keyboard-sense? By 
impressing upon it all difficulties as unit-movements; by 
proceeding from the foundation of the difficulty, with 
application of all the pertaining exercise-material; and 
by gradually reconstructing the difficulties to such a 
degree, that the keyboard-sense finally reacted uncon¬ 
sciously and felt the difficulty mastered as a whole.” 

But how did we educate our ear? “By storing it 
with the related phrases and especially the transitions, 
in their sound and content also as unit-movements, and 
this both through vocal experiment and through com- 
parison.” , , ' , 

Thus we see that three senses are to help us, two ot 
which, the ear and the keyboard-sense, are already 
trained to the finest degree. In people with “good mem¬ 
ories” these three divisions of the musical memory are 
trained by instinct; therefore they can give no account 
of them. Their teachers have failed to make their talent 
their possession. But the people for whom playing by 
heart is a book with seven seals prove that they not only 
do not possess this instinct, but that they also have not 
substituted for it perception and development of the 
will- and nerve-apparatus. Their technical study can only 
have been empty thrashing of notes; they can have no 


conception of proper analysis and reconstruction; for 
otherwise “something” must have remained in their 

"development of playing by heart comes of itself 
with proper study. First my fingers comprehend the 
units of the special difficulties. The road to this goal is 
not found in the notes, I am compelled by myself from 
within to see and hear the necessary preparatory exer- 
d es They must be played by heart, their elaborations 
of course as well, until finally the whole passage has been 
mastered by the memory. Then to test whether it has 
really been transferred into my keyboard-sense, 1 must 
practice it in connection with its introductory measures, 
and in transitions, I must link on the two mclosuig 
phrases. The study of the effects with aid of the eai 
also necessitates innumerable repetitions of this whole 
passage, which has already been stamped upon the mem¬ 
ory by the keyboard-sense. Still more easily than the 
passages is the character of the themes impressed upon 
the ear which is inoculated with the keyboard-sense by 
study of the tone-color. . 

Where these natural aids do not in all instances 
suffice, as for example in parallel passages with different 
harmonization, perhaps figured basses written out by the 
pupil for himself will help to fill out these gaps, and m 
giving at the same time to eye and ear the best musical 

When we have made the themes and the difficult 
passages our own, each with its introductions and con¬ 
tinuations, not so very much of the piece will be left. At 
any rate, the mastery of what remains and the connection 
of the whole can not cause trouble, and therewith the 
problem is solved of itself by following a method which 
appeals to the intelligence of the pupil. 

“That’s all very well,” someone says, perhaps, but 
that doesn’t guarantee my not breaking down in public. 
Nothing will guarantee that. It is a matter of practice, 
surety and to a great degree, self-consciousness-hut 
even these are not infallible. The following means may 
perhaps assist, however, in testing the infallibility firstly 
of the keyboard-sense: 

Imagine you are appea-ing at this very moment upon 
the platform. Take your position before an audience as 
you would under such circumstances and play your solo 
through without stopping. Slips will come too easily, 
often in the simplest places. Naturally—for the easy 
passages have been less practiced in the difficult special 
training of hand and ear. Playing under these unaccus¬ 
tomed conditions will at once bring the nerves, not 
wholly under control, out of the train of action. For the 
concert-stage, however, one must learn not to let dis¬ 
turbing influence act upon one’s self. 

The use of the metronome has a similar effect. Nat¬ 
urally it can only be employed in passages the direction 
of which falls not to me, but to the leader of the 
orchestra. The metronome is splendid in this way, how¬ 
ever, namely that it forces us to observe the rhythm 
not as subjectively felt, but as objectively assigned. 

Then there are two other supplementary means. One 
of them is to play over the pieces in the mind. Where 
in the mind’s picture we do not see the fingers come 
down clearly, wherever in this illusory playing they fail 
to work fast enough, at that spot there is an uncer¬ 
tainty. This whole process is helped along by the eye, 
which we can assist by writing down those passages 
whose rendering fails. That is a method very service¬ 
able for Bach especially; it takes a great deal of time, but 
is eminently worth the trouble. 

As to the manner in which the eye, through reading 
of those invisible notes, in a way supports the keyboard- 
sense in the real performance; as to how the ear during 
the performance of a familiar group of notes, uncon¬ 
sciously hurries ahead to the preparation of the next 
group; how eye, ear and hand supplement each other— 
these things each one must learn to observe for himself, 
and with nerves rightly trained beforehand he will be 
able easily to do so. 


The Parting Word 

By Ada Mae Hoffrek 


Unless the lesson has been altogether bad—and there 
are very few lessons that are altogether that—the alert 
teacher will find it an excellent idea to be sure to give 
the pupil a word of encouragement just before bidding 
the pupils goodbye. As you are_giving the lesson remem¬ 
ber what pleased you most and epitomize that in a little 
paragraph. In other words, send the pupil off with a 


pleasant thought, a constructive thought, a stimulating 
thought, instead of with a criticism of some little details. 
At the same time the pupil should know when he is not 
making progress. It should not be camouflaged wit 
compliments or evasions of the real truth. But the very 
last words—let them point to the pupil’s real accom¬ 
plishment and send him away pleased. 


the etude 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 567 


t ' r rs 

; ^ -j.Uv.Slsl. X S Sift. S „ ^_» " * ^ 



Getting Real Happiness From Your Music 

Psychology and the Young Musician 

By DANIEL GREGORY MASON 

Associate Professor of Music, Columbia University, N. Y. 


V- 




[Editor’s Note: Daniel Gregory Mason is a nephew 
of Dr. William Mason, the author of many successful 
books and a composer of music which has received dis- 
iinguished consideration. He is a pupil of Ncvin, Chad- 
wick, Goetschius and Vincent D’lndy. 

Prof. Mason’s article is based largely upon the prin¬ 
ciple discovered by the great psychologist, Ignas Freud, 
of Vienna. Dr. Freud employed a method of searching 
into the past of his patients by means of a scientific 
analysis of their dreams. In this way he has been able 
to record mental disturbances brought about by exagge¬ 


rated emotions and unusual impressions and repressions 
in the past which have resulted in diseases which could 
not be explained in any other way. 

By reasoning with the patient and removing the 
thought which, lodged in the unconscious mind, has been 
causing all the damage, the practitioners of the Freudian 
Psychoanalysis have been able to do work which savors 
of the miraculous. One instance brought to the editor’s 
attention was of a college graduate who became a raving 
maniac. The identity of the mental disturbance which 
had caused the trouble was located in the harsh measures 


used in his youth to prevent him doing something that 
he greatly desired to accomplish. This was removed and 
a complete cure was effected. 

The whole world is now discussing the possibilities of 
this wonderful discovery and, naturally, quacks ivithout 
number have begun to impose upon the public through 
it. It is something which only the highly trained scien¬ 
tist should be permitted to practice. Prof. Mason en¬ 
deavors to remove from the minds of Etude readers a 
thought which may permit them to find much higher and 
wider happiness in their art.] 


Modern psychology, and in particular the method of 
psycho-analysis introduced by Dr. Sigmund Freud, of 
Vienna, has made it possible for us to recognize, more 
clearly than ever before, certain dangers that menace 
all young artists, dangers the harder to recognize because 
they are in considerable measure subjective. In addition 
to a technic subtle enough to analyze them, psycho¬ 
analysis has given us certain general conceptions of how 
they hide themselves by a sort of mental camouflage, 
from which we must drag them forth if we would con¬ 
quer them. By showing us how, of two paths open to us, 
we tend to take the easier rather than the better one, 
and then by what it calls “rationalization” to give our¬ 
selves high-sounding reasons for our laziness, it has made 
more possible to us a conscious choice of the better way. 
It is not too much to say that an intelligent comprehen¬ 
sion of the actual working of our impulses, and of the 
camouflages given them by our self-esteem, such as 
might be gained by reading a few standard books on 
psycho-analysis*, would save almost every young musi¬ 
cian a good many false steps, and, by concentrating his 
efforts where they would best tell, would materially im¬ 
prove his .work. 

, “Will to Power” 

Every human being discovers psycho-analysis neces¬ 
sarily and legitimately craves some kind of power. Each 
one of us feels that he must somehow effectuate himself, 
make himself count, work upon the world so that in some 
way it will be different from what it would be had he 
never existed. This “will - to power” psycho-analysis 
frankly recognizes as a fundamental fact a dumb push or 
urge in each individual mind, deeper than intelligence, 
deeper than consciousness, irrational, immoral and in¬ 
eradicable. This it is which expresses itself in every act 
that strives to impose the will of the individual upon the 
world, from the struggle of a Napoleon to dominate 
Europe down to the effort of a shop girl to make heir 
stature more noticeable by wearing French heels. 

Psycho-analysis wastes no time scolding at this will to 
power, as some of the older moralisms used tc do. Ac¬ 
cepting it as fundamental, it proceeds to examine and 
chart down the main channels of its expression. It has, 
as Bertrand Russell shows clearly, two such main chan¬ 
nels of instinct through which to work: the creative in¬ 
stinct, seeking power through self-directed activity, 
through the ability to “shape things nearer to the heart’s 
desire”; and the possessive instinct, seeking it through 
the accumulation of goods, and the economic domination 
they give over others. A type of man in whom the cre¬ 
ative instinct is strongly preponderant would be Mozart 
in his later life, in abject poverty, but so wrapped iri 
musical thought that he often forgot to be cold and hun¬ 
gry. A type in whom the possessive'instinct is strongly 
in the ascendant is the miser-millionaire, so intent in the 
passive pleasures of his coffers and his bank-books and 
the evidence they give of his power over the lives of 
others that he almost forgets how pitifully empty is his 
own life. But these cases are hardly normal. In every 


•An untechnieal statement of the general theory is T)r. 
Wilfrid Lay s Man’s Unconscious Conflict. Its bearings on 
conduct are studied in Edwin G. Holt’s The Freudian Wish. 
In Why Men Fight, hy Bertrand Russell, the relation of 
instincts and institutions is inBpiringly discussed. 


normal human being there is some of each instinct, and 
the only questions to ask are, “In what proportion are 
they mixed?” and perhaps, “What proportion is most 
likely to bring happiness and success?” 

In its answer to the latter question, psycho-analysis 
has its first surprise in store for us. The usually ac¬ 
cepted view is that possession is of supreme importance 
and creation of hardly any at all. Especially with us in 
America “success” is almost synonymous with the accu¬ 
mulation of money. Our materialistic view of even the 
most intangible spiritual values is grotesquely summed up 
in the advertising tag, “Happiness in a Box.” Few of 
us would willingly change places with Mozart, so in¬ 
tensely active mentally that he had no thought for bodily 
discomfort; few would shrink from the desolating empti¬ 
ness, when truly seeir, of the miser-millionaire, preoccu¬ 
pied with passive pleasures. Yet psycho-analysis quietly 
reverses the popular judgment. Permanent happiness 
and genuine success, it says, come only to him in whom 
the creative instincts preponderate; since they alone de¬ 
velop actively the individuality to which possessions can 
give only passive pleasures and which they often begin 
hy sheltering and protecting only at last to imprison 
and starve. Who is right here, psycho-analysis or the 
man in the street? Which is the true answer to this 
question of emphasis, of such supreme importance to the 



Daniel Gregory Mason 


right ordering of the life of every young artist? Is it the 
one the herd is forever bawling in his ear, or the one 
that in rare moments he can just discern being whis¬ 
pered to him by the “still small voice” of his intuition, 
and that modern psychology is now beginning to cor¬ 
roborate? 

In nothing, for instance, is the herd more unanimous 
than in insisting that a young man choosing a profes¬ 
sion should always choose one that “pays.” Let US 
imagine the case of a violinist, say, hesitating between 
entering the orchestra of a “movie” house and joining a 
new and obscure string quartet as second violin. Can 
you not hear the plausible argument of the herd? “If 
"you . go into the movies you will have a good, regular 
salary which will enable you to buy yourself comforts, 
and even luxuries. Who knows, you may even have your 
own motor-car before you get through, and ride to re¬ 
hearsals! And you will be part of a recognized indus¬ 
try and considered a man of importance. 

“In the quartet you would get wretched pay, because 
there is little or nrt regular demand for such highbrow 
stuff. You would work like a dog and get nothing to 
show for it. Why. you would not even he first violin, 
hut only second! It is your duty to yourself, to your 
parents, to your possible future wife and children, to 
take the respectable and promising position offered you.” 
To all of which the millions of young men to whom the 
Herd has spoken in this fatherly manner, patting them 
on the back the while, have little more to answer than 
that they have a sort of feeling (“A sort of feeling!” 
sneers Herd, “as against a very flattering and advanta¬ 
geous offer.”) that they should prefer playing second vi¬ 
olin in quartets of real beauty (“Beauty versus Bread?” 
mutters Herd) at ten dollars a week, to grinding out 
rag-time for a hundred (“Rag-time!” indignantly an¬ 
swers Herd. “You needn’t talk of it so patronizingly. 
It is loved by thousands who will have none of your 
classical quartets.”) 

Where Psychology Helps 

All this leaves the student rather defenseless until mod¬ 
ern psychology comes to his aid. It points out with the 
unanswerable dispassionateness of science that you give 
a man little satisfaction when you gratify his desires at 
the cost of starving his impulses. “What good will his 
motor-car do this young man,” it asks, “if he is so jaded 
by monotonous, uncongenial drudgery that he takes no 
joy in life? What satisfaction will Social prestige give 
him in the midst of his personal boredom? Better for 
him to breakfast on bread and water, walk to inconspicu¬ 
ous but delightful work with an elastic step and a 
brightening eye at the thought of renewing the activity 
which is his unfailing joy. Heap his possessions to the 
skies, bruit his fame to the four quarters of the globe, 
and unless he enjoys his job it is all dust and ashes to 
him. But keep his creative instinct fruitfully employed 
and he will be happy in poverty and obscurity.” ‘‘Each 
man’s necessary path,” says Thoreau, “though as obscure 
and uneventful as that of a beetle in the grass, is the way 
to the deepest joys he is susceptible of. Though he con¬ 
verses only with moles and fungi, and disgraces his rela¬ 
tives, it is no matter, if he knows what is steel to his 
flint.” 












































Page 568 SEPTEMBER 1921 

Psycho-analysis is thus a powerful ally to the young 
student by adding its scientific testimotty to the instgh 
of seers like Thoreau, against the worldly fallacy that 
life is justified by its products rather than in its proc¬ 
esses. But if it succeed in saving him from such 
wide-spread fallacies and the external pressure to lower 
his aims that they bring to bear upon him, it has sffll 
to save him from a more insidious enemy, his own 
sloth and its “rationalizations.” The exercise of the 
creative instinct is peculiarly laborious, ^renuous and 
exacting. It has to meet and conquer difficult es in 
destribably more subtle than the material obstacles en 
countered by possessiveness. Hence a man w o 
chosen a way of life that exercises his creativeness is 
under a constant temptation, usually unsuspected by 
hipiself, to abandon or at least abate it, and to seek *e 
relief of an easier existence; and his devil is constantly 
whispering in his ear many edifying reasons for such 
change—“rationalizations” such as psycho-analysis c 
detect, but usually not the untrained conscience. 

Discipline Needed 

For example, let us suppose the case of a young com- 
ooser of good gifts not yet thoroughly developed The 
process of discipline to which he must sub]ect * e ™ ™ 
order to attain the highest creativeness of which he is 
capable, will be long and arduous, lasting through years 
when he will be getting little tangible reward ini either 
money or reputation. All this time he knows that 
he would but sacrifice this discipline wluch nothmg but 
his intangible inner creativeness exacts, if he would 
consent to write not his own thoughts and feelings but 
those oft-repeated, pleasantly familiar commonplaces 
that “the public wants,” his compositions would begin 
to sell and his name to be known, he would begin to 
receive royalties and a kind of renown. In short his 
possessive" instinct would be taken off. the s arvatmn 
rations on which he has been keeping it in order to feed 
his creativeness. 

And now note the last and innermost enemy that 
agsails him, subtlest of all, the “rationalization” of the 
psycho-analyst. He begins to call his temptabons lw 
high-sounding names, in the ^conscious effort to pal¬ 
liate his surrender to them. The Herd becomes Hu 
manity,” and his traffic with it becomes listening to the 
Vox Populi which is also Vox Dei. His f . or “ er ^' 
votion to an ideal of beauty was sinful pride . the 
eccentricity into which the untrained mind inevitably 
falls is now canonized as “originality” (most origi¬ 
nality” that is much insisted upon is of that kind) and 
the lack of discipline, lost through a failure of per¬ 
sistence, is dubbed “independence.” 

Thus do names begin to exert their immeasurable in¬ 
fluence, and the student’s own sloth becomes a con¬ 
spirator with the backwardness of the public to seduce 
him from following the only path in which he could 
ever find true originality and independence, the origi¬ 
nality that dares to create and the independence that will 
not be misled into mere possession. Nothing but a 
candor that is above cozening itself, and a courage to 
match it, will save him now; but psycho-analysis may 
help to make the issue clear and thus to focus his ener¬ 
gies where they are needed. The reward for such a 
supreme effort of insight and honest self-analysis will 
be great—nothing less than the preservation of the fine 
flower of happiness. 


Holding the Young Child’s Interest 

By Marcella Francisca Nachman 

How very much the child of six to eight years needs 
something to give interest to practice. To him scales 
are so dull and finger exercises so monotonous. The 
child cannot see what these have to do with the playing 
of a piece; and so keeping these young students at prac¬ 
tice becomes a bore if not a burden. 

A clever little device that interests the child pupil is 
to name the various scales and exercises according to 
the way they are played. For instance, if the Scale of C 
is to be played very slowly call it “Sleepy Head.” When 
it is to be played fast call it “The Wide-Awake Boy.” 
A lively march-like exercise may be The Passing Pa¬ 
rade. A study in three-four time may be Little Bear 
Waltz. If you can learn what is one of the pets of the 
child name a piece for it, as, Fido’s Dance, or, for a 
lively study, it may be Little Duck’s Chase. All this 
will make the pupil feel that it is learning something 
more than a mere exercise, 


Which is the More Difficult? 

By Hazel Victoria. .Goodwin 

The belief is common that it is more difficult to 'eam 

and inversely with volume in rapid playing. 

In attempting to account for this, one must consider 
iu» i. L weight oi .he arm ta, o,ta. »« ™ » 
do in each tempo extreme. Let us take the case 
SLOW claying. One can lunge the weight of the 
So a foSssimo chord, octave or single ttoe, regard «s 
of the condition of the hand-wh.ch may be fairly lax. 
The weight serves to depress the keys, and there isi no 
hurry. In pianissimo playing, however, one is deniea 
this weight of the arm as a means of sending down the 
keys, because too loud a tone would otherwise ensue. 
One must summon up the very fine-mechanism of the 
hand; for only the tiny, swift muscles of the hand can 
overcome the resistance of the keys without allowing 
anything but a morsel of the energy to get to the piano- 
strings- And so slow soft playing is more difficult than 
slow loud playing. ., 

The tables, for most people, are turned in the case 
of RAPID playing. Rapid, soft playing demands activ¬ 
ity of the hand mechanism spoken of above. Yet, when 
a passage demands volume as well as rapidity the hand 
spans must be not only staunch and fleet but also under 
what for them is a great weight, just as staunch and 
fleet as though they had no weight to bear at all. Fancy 
yourself running about deftly and easily with a thou¬ 
sand odd pounds upon the shoulders, a load ten times 
one’s own weight 1 Yet the hand must do a similar thing 
in bounding about under the weight of the arm. Hue 
in rapid passages of great tone volume the arm-weight 
carries down the key, thus relieving the hand of this of¬ 
fice ; but the advantage is not so great as the disadvantage 
of coping with weight. 


Why Some Organists Fall into a Rut 

By W. Elliss 

Why will organists “move heaven and earth,” so to 
speak, to secure an appointment, and then straightway 
get into a rut. Often they neither try to improve them- 
serves nor the services of the church at which they play. 
They fail to provide interesting music for their volun¬ 
taries, feeling, presumably, that so long as they behave 
themselves their position is secure. . 

Let us for a moment consider the source of a tew in 
whose places we would love to stand. 

Though he knew every detail of the magnificent organ 
in St George’s Hall, of Liverpool, it was the custom of 
the late and famous W. T. Best to practice frequently ; 
this in spite of the fact that he was giving three recitals 
weekly, and thus was thoroughly familiar with his 
instrument. When, at length, he announced his inten¬ 
tion to resign, a neighbor to his suburban home reported 
that he had resumed piano practice to the extent of three 
or four hours per day, evidently with the intention oi 
feeling himself in good form to the end. At the finish 
of his public career critics and public agreed that he 
never had played better, his last series of recitals calling 
forth unstinted praise and appreciation- 

illustrating the character of two distinguished, men, an 
incident occurred several years before Mr. Best’s retire¬ 
ment. It became known to the public that the celebrated 
French organist and composer, M. Saint-Saens, was 
spending a holiday in Liverpool. Suggestions came from 
many directions that he be requested to give some recitals 
on the great St. George’s Hall organ. Letters on the 
subject appeared daily in the newspapers. Finding that 
apparently no steps were being taken in the matter a sec¬ 
tion of the musical public began to accuse Mr. Best of 
jealousy, in that he would not arrange for Saint-Saeps 
to play. Some even hintfed that he Ought to be removed 
from his position. 

This went on without Mr. Best taking any part in the 
excited correspondence or defending himself in any way, 
until evidently he thought the matter had gone far 
enough. Then a brief letter covered his detractors with 
confusion. It stated that M. Saint-Saens was a guest in 
his home and that he had done all he could to induce his 
distinguished visitor to give at least one or two recitals, 
but that M. Saint-Saens had naturally refused to im¬ 
peril his reputation,by performing on an organ so big 
and complicated without having familiarized himself with 
its mechanism, and this he had not time to do. 


THE ETUDE 

Illustrations that Prod the Interest 

By Helen J. Andrus 

who had 

efct Suddenly th« teacher tamed 

- - *. 

W Th! Sd nulled, fur (bis was •.W ”d she un- 
mediately played the study perfectly. This lesson m 

“a UtttegH was"playing 8 a march in which part of the 
melodv was in the bass. She could not bring out the 
melody, and also play the chords Softly with *6^ 

parades tl pa^sed^by'? ,S The"chil'd had noticed them and was 

one of the big horns, while the music of the other in¬ 
struments would be played quite softly, so the P eo P le ^ 
the street could distinctly hear the big horn The chdd 
then easily played that part of the piece with a strong 
melody and soft accompaniment. 


Seven Keys to Listening 

By Mary Janet Cutler 

For judging or appreciating Music as well as other 
Arts, we must be educated. We must know the way to 
listen is with the attention concentrated and the mini 
alert, ready to receive the sounds in such a way as o 
grasp their meaning and mentally digest them. Ak. 
we must know what to listen for, best told by answei mg 
seven questions. . 

1 What is the nature of the composition. Does t 
represent something outside itself and thus become > o- 
gram Music, or is it Absolute Music? 

. 2 For what instruments is the composition written. 

Is it for a complete orchestra, for stringed instruments, 
for piano alone, etc. ? . t 

3. What is the approximate date? The answering of 
this question will determine a great deal about the style 
and character of a composition. Music development 
though slow during the early years, has been of a prog¬ 
ressive and overlapping type. So, we do not expect to 
find in Beethoven the kind of musical ideas that are 
accustomed to be associated with Rubinstein or to antic¬ 
ipate the sentiment of Tschaikowsky m the works of 

4. What are the chief themes? We must be aide to 
seize upon these and to remember them in such a way 
that their subsequent development may be clear to our 
mind and therefore a source of real interest. Only as 
a composer takes the melody as raw material, develops 
it and makes it form a part of an elaborate composition, 
does his work enter the realm of Art. Often one or 
two little “given ideas,” like the initial theme of Beeth¬ 
oven’s Symphony No. 5, in C minor, causes whole move¬ 
ments to spring into being. We shall therefore want to 
recognize these themes in their simple selves and later 
in their development; and so we shall want to know . !,_« 

5. How did the composer develop his ideas? Is it 
by variation of the theme, by the use of a minor effect 
for a major, by a change of key, and rhythm, by repe¬ 
tition or what? If the latter method mentioned is used 
we shall want to know whether it is good repetition or 
simply a reiteration with further emphasis. 

Following the development of the little themes, the 
interest will be aroused as to, 

6. What is the Form of the work? This can only he 

answered after the listener has studied the smaller two 
and three part forms and the larger forms such as t e 
Sonata and Symphony. , 

After these thematic questions, the attention is direct 
to the melodic division of the subject and the questio 
seven arises, . . e 

7. Can anyone in any sense follow and appreciate . 
subtle effects of harmony? Fitness of harmony to * ^ 
the melody gives truth of expression and distingto 
the artist composer from the “jingler.” With the beg 
nings of Music, the Harmony was exceedingly simp > 
developing little by little until a very simple melody 

be clothed in beautiful Harmony. 


THE ETUDE 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 569 


i 



Modern Violin Study 

By LEOPOLD AUER 

Short Extract, Iron, “ Violin Playing, I ft ” Mcssor Auer's recently 

published masterly work. Reprinted here by Special Arrangement 
with Professor Auer and the Publishers, 

Frederick A. Stokes Company 




' pupil" of "his great 

Soloist to the Tzar 
the St. Petersburg 


Holding the Violin 

T „ holding the violin the first thing to bear in mind 
is ffiat it should be held in such a position that.the eyes 
mav be fixed on the head of the instrument, and the 
ami should lie thrust forward under me back of he 
violin so that the fingers will fall perpendicularly on the 
strings, the fingertips striking them with deeded 

“ecmid important poinHs 

undTrZtttheTiolin. The placing of a cushion beneath 
the back of the instrument, m or f r ‘° 
cure support to the chin grip, should also be avoided. 
These -e bad habits which one should from the^ very 
.tart carefully avoid, since they not only spoil the vio¬ 
linist’s pose in general, but-and this is extremely im¬ 
portant-^ make the player lose at leasta thprdofthe 

whole body of tone which his v, . ol f n " be ' we ak one-is 
indifferent instrument, a powerful or a weak one—is 

Ca As'f or * the°chin-res t, the one used shouldbeadapted 

Those violinists who rest the instrument against ^he 
shoulder, and place a cushion at its back-bcth of wtach 
act as mutes—evidently have no notion of the disas 
trous effect this arrangement has on their tone. 

Always try to raise your violin as high as possible, m 
order to secure for your hand the-greatest freedom of 
movement from one position to another This may be 
accomplished by slightly advancing the left arm toward 

^Endeavor always to lessen the distance between to 
arms, to bring them together by inclining the body 
slightly to the left, yet without resting the left arm 
against the front of the body. At first you will not find 
it at all easy to raise the violin without support, but in 
the course of time one accustoms oneself to it, with a re¬ 
sultant gain in facility in reaching the higher positions, 
as well as in the playing of rapid descending passages. 

Sing on Your Violin 

Joachim, Weiniawski, Sarasate and others-every 
great violinist of the close of the last century-had each 
his own individual manner of holding the bovy; since each 
one of them had a differently shaped and proportioned 
arm, muscles and fingers. Joachim, for instance, held 
his bow with his second, third and fourth fingers (1 ex¬ 
cept the thumb), with his first finger often in the air 
Ysaye, on the contrary, holds the bow with his first 
three ’fingers, with his little finger raised in the air 
Sarasate used all his fingers on the stick, which did not 
prevent him from developing a free, singing tone and 
airy lightness in his passage-work. The single fact that 
can be positively established is that in producing their 
tone these great artists made exclusive use of wrist- 
pressure on the strings. (The arm must never be used 
for that purpose.) Yet which of the two, wrist-pressure 
or finger-pressure, these masters emphasized at a given 
moment—which they used when they wished to. lend a 
certain definite color to a phrase, or to throw into re¬ 
lief one or more notes which seemed worth while ac¬ 
centing—is a problem impossible of solution. 

Incidentally, we may observe the same causes and the 
same effects in the bow technique of the virtuosi of the 
present time. They may have nothing in common 
either in talent or temperament, yet, notwithstanding this 
fact, each one of them will, according to his own indi¬ 
viduality, produce a beautiful tone. The tone of the 
one may be more sonorous, that of the other more trans¬ 
parent, yet both will lie ravishing to hear, and not even 
the closest attention will enable you to divine which form 



or degree of finger-pressure the artist has exerted to 
produce his tone. Young students cannot be told too 
often: “Sing, sing on your violin! It is the only way 
in which to make its voice tolerable to the listener. 


Hints on Tone Production 

When taking up the bow with the fingers, lower the 
hand in such a way that the bow falls naturally into 
position, of its own accord. By so doing you will obvi- 
ate the feeling which impels you to cling tightly to the 

Hold the bow lightly, yet with sufficient firmness to 
be able to handle it with ease ; above all, do not try to 
bring out a big tqne by pressing the bow on the strings. 
This is an art in itself, and can' only be developed by 
means of hard work and experience. 

Do not press down the bow with the arm: the whole 
body of sound should be produced by means oi a high 
pressure of the wrist, which may be increased, little by 
little, until it calls forth a full tone, perfectly pure and 





lessor Auer’s new work is probably the most important book 
upon violin playing ever written. It is especially rich in 
content for students and young teachers. The Etude takes 
pleasure in presenting the following extract, possibly made 
more interesting because Professor Auer has transferred his 
teaching activities to America.] 


equal in power, from the nut to the point of the bow, 
and vice versa. ’ 

Begin with slow strokes with the whole length of the 
bow, allowing ten or twelve seconds for each down- and 
up-stroke, and stop as soon as you feel fatigue. The 
muscles and the joints of the wrist and forearm stand 
in need of relaxation after an effort which, however 
slight, has been continuous. 

The degree of finger-pressure to be applied to the 
stick is a question of experience, of observation from 
the instructive gide, and also of discipline. 

In order to learn properly how to obtain an equal 
tone, both at the nut and at the point of the bow, the 
natural tendency of the hand to press down upon the 
bow at the nut,—because of the greater weight of this 
part of the stick—and, contrariwise, to weaken at the 
point,—the weakest portion of the Stick — must be 
counterbalanced by additional pressure—always of the 

Style in Violin Playing 

Historical style, traditional style: I acknowledge tot 
there are such things, just as we have armor in museums 
and time-hallowed observances. And I will not withhold 
due respect to all musical tradition which serves a useful 
purpose, which is a contribution to the general history of 
music. Style, however, is incidental to its period. It 
changes but does not develop — I am speaking as a vio¬ 
linist, of violin playing—in the sense that its develop¬ 
ment is sequential. How can it? Style in reality is the 
temporary crystallization, at various periods, of the ideals 
of violin interpretation best suited to the intellectual and 
musical feeling of the periods in question, and born of 
the violin music of those periods itself. No doubt 
it has even in a measure, been influenced by the make 
of the instrument. Speaking in a general way, the high 
model violins, such as those of the Stainer type,, speak 
more readily, while the flatter violins of the Cremona 
school have more carrying power and flexibility, and 
their tone is more susceptible to subtle variation by the 
player. That the greater interpretative possibilities of 
the Cremona type have had their favorable influence on 
violin composition is more than probable. But this is 
only incidental. The music written for the violin by the 
older masters and played by them did far more to de¬ 
termine the syle of their period. 

Another century, other music—other music, another 
style. Of course we do not play Bach as we play 
Tschaikowsky. But that is not really because tradition 
tells us that Bach requires a different interpretation. Mu¬ 
sical instinct is sufficient. We play Bach differently be¬ 
cause his music itself make us observe certain canons 
of taste, certain modes of expressional procedure in pre¬ 
senting his Sonatas or his Concertos. But I again insist 
that it is not because of any traditional feeling—at least 
it should not be — for Bach’s works rise far above all 
considerations of historical style in their grandeur and 
majesty, their soul and charm. We play them, or try 
to play them, as Bach’s music should be played — rever¬ 
ently, almost as a rite of the sacrosanct mass of beauty, 
expressing as best we may, individually, all that they 
convey. Probably no great violinist of to-day plays the 
Bach sonatas as they were played by the well-known 
violinists of Bach’s own day. Yet, despite the fact that 
the player may be centuries removed from the interpre¬ 
tative spirit of Bach's time, he may play Bach sonatas 
better than they were wont to be played then. The 
musical spirit of Bach transcends all narrow limitations 
of period, and the artist of to-day who truly enters into 
this spirit will play Bach as he should be played, and 
will play Bach better because he will play him in the 
interpretative spirit of our own generation, not that, of 
1720. 





































Page 570 SEPTEMBER 1921 

Eye-Training for Music-Students 

By Dr. Herbert Sanders 
Eye and Ear Training: A Parallel 

For a decade-and-a-half the trend of music-study 
has been in the direction of ear-training; and this is 
riehh for a trained ear to the musician is what a 
trained eye is to the artist. It is the ear which guides 
and colors the tone (whether vocal or instrumental) 
as the eye of the artist guides the hand and colors 
the canvas. The three senses which the music-student 
must develop are. sight, hearing and touch; and it 
would be a profitable inquiry for him to consider the 
relative importance of these three senses, that they 
might be developed along scientific lines in his study 
and practice. Does s : ght come first in importance 
or hearing? Of what importance is the sense of toucn 
In mechanical work at the piano the sense of touch 
is cultivated. Whenever we hear music the sense ot 
hearing is exercised, and every time we hear with at¬ 
tention it is cultivated. The sense of sight is only 
exercised when the student looks at the printed page of 
music which lies open before him. 

In order of operation, then, if not in importanc , 
sight comes first. Yet I have come to the sad con¬ 
clusion that among music-students that it is the least 
cultivated of the three active senses m music-produc¬ 
tion sight, hearing and touch. In concentrating on 
••ear” we have forgotten ‘ sight.” The reason piano- 
' playing for instance, is often indifferent is because 
the music-page has never been entirely and accurately 

On Reading Ahead 

Excellent sight-readers are frequently asked by sup¬ 
posed uninstructed but musically-inclined people: How 
far do you read ahead?” If you have been asked the 
pertinent question did you give an answer satisfactory 
to yourself? Did you answer "a line ? or a page . 
Those who are blest with the Tonal Vision, .. r, the 
power of realizing music without the aid of an instru¬ 
ment—the "hearing with the eye,” or conversely the 
"seeing with the ear,” as it lias been aptly cal ed, would 
probably answer: “As far as I can mentally reahze 
he music at the moment”; arid generally speaking this 
nv be the correct answer. This ability is the result 
„f musical training or instinct. But have you notmed 
that the less musically gifted-those whc'have no Tona 
Vision—can often do the same thing? By what mental 
nrocess are they able to get the same result? I think 
the answer is this: those possessing the Tonal Vision 
realize the music itself, i. r.. the symbols are translated 
into imaginary sounds and it is these imaginary sounds 
which are remembered; those without this ability 
pictorially realize the printed page. That is to say, 

I hey retain not the imaginary music but only the sym¬ 
bols! (the instrument afterwards does the translating 
into sound) ; others, again, may adequately realize both 
symbol and sound, though rarely m the same degree 
jt i s exceptional to find sight and hearing equally 
developed to a fine point in the same person. 

Possibilities of Sight 

Some readers may think this theory rather far-fetched 
and it would seem to be so if we put an arbitrary limit 
to our sense development—a very unscientific pro¬ 
ceeding. But what are the possibilities of sight. I 
will start with the English money system £-s-d be¬ 
cause I am accustomed to it (that is. the system, not 
the money) and it happens to come to mind first. Now 
if I had some large sum of English money to add I 
would start with the farthings and proceed to the 
pence then to the shillings and finally to the pounds 
But people who have become experts with the English 
monetary system through continuous working with 
™ would scorn such a slow and primitive method. 
They would add the three denominations at once. 

srsswa V? = 

they may be said to look at the sum pictona ly, the con¬ 
scious analysis may or may not follow later 

Take another instance—that of our boy-Scouts They 
are instructed to pass a store and in passing to give 
a dance at the window (not to linger and count or 
classify the things it contains, that would be leisured 
analyses), after the glance they have to enumerate and 
describethe things they saw. (It may be incidental y 
mentioned that this includes two acts, the first s 
merely sensation, they see the wndow; the second is 
perception they perceive the order, number and size of 
the things seen. Sensation is the effect of something 
exterioAo ourselves on ourselves; perception is the 


every moment of our lives w tr ; e d 

even though at the moment we saw w 

SftKKS - 

insurmountable obstacle to a persevering eye. 

W. Human aud hm™ -f 

„J y Dca,,, tell, of a girl who was *»'”* 

through her dress catching fire. She was & e 
lire at the time of the accident and to get a draught 
she used a newspaper in front of the fire-gra . 
feverish delirium which followed she recitedl what was 
evidently a tremendously long extract from a news 
paper Subsequent investigation pointed to the fact th 
at to moment her dress had taken fire the burning 
paper had made such an impression on her m nd that 
she had remembered (subconsciously, as a picture for 
she hadn’t read it) a part of the reading-matter and 
it was this she was reciting. Of course this is an 
exceptional case, but it illustrates the possibility of my 
contention-that at a thoroughly attentive glance a page 
of matter (to which music-matter can be no exception) 
can be grasped as a whole and fixed in the memory 
ready for conscious ^analysis (i. e reading) whenit 
pa-e is withdrawn? I will hazard a guess that at least 
twenty-five per cent.ybf the mistakes which the average 
music-pupil makes are due to the fact that they rarely 
see the printed music at all but only see a part, and 
often a very small part of it. Some see the notes but 
not the accidentals, others see the melody but not the 
harmony, others never see the fingering, and so on 
There are (as I have stated) other reasons for this 
(the lack of the Tonal Vision for example), but in a 


THE ETUDE 

, rase , it is a positive certainty that few 

players grasp the full content of the music page before 
them. They “have eyes but see not. 

Some Experiments for Music-Students 

rive vourself or your pupils “eye” as well as “ear” 
t J s for purposes of experiment. As you might play 
a bft of music to a pupil and ask him to write or play 
afterwards, similarly give him a glance at a page 
of music and ask him to write or play what he has seen. 
You will find after such an experiment that only a 
very small part of the printed page has been realized 
and some would be unable to say whether the music 
was fingered or not. There is no scientific reason why 
“eye” tests should not be given as well as tests 

a trained eye .is as essential to musicianship as a trained 

^The possibilities of ear development are illustrated 
in the historical incident of Mozart leaving church with 
the unpublished Mass in his head or pocket. The pos¬ 
sibilities of eye development can be seen in the artist 
who paints seascape or landscape from memory and 
an artist assures me that hundreds do it. Perhaps it 
i* that we are inclined to see the music page as we 
hear music, i. taking in a bit at a time Music itself 
cannot, of course, be grasped in any other way , t 
the instantaneous possibilities of sight rare y r 
consideration. And yet there is so much in a look, 
for one a glance at nature means nothing, for anothei 
it means the birth of a sonnet—it depends largely on 
the glance and who gives it. Of one thing there can 
be no doubt: to become accomplished sight-readers 
the first step (and the one rarely perfected) u visual ly 
to realize the printed page of music; for how on ear i 
are we to translate the symbols into sound or actio 
if we have never really seen and realized the symbols: 


Read, Read, Read 

By Ernest Eberhard 


The very best way to learn to sight-read ; in fact, 

uZoi thZroyal «*.* .= 

thing that you can lay your hands ° n - U" ders ‘"1to 
rhythmical figures and chords that you are likely 
come across in every-day usage, then spend live or te 
minutes every day in this exceedingly useful exercise 
It will do you more good than half an hour s study a^ 
technic and pieces. I feel extremely sorry for the per 
son who, while recognizing the importance of readi g. 
is yet so shiftless and lazy as to consider it to be ot 

^Gradually increase the amount of time (hat you 
spend reading as your ability and taste for it become 
greater. You will find that the phrases, the sentences 
the entire sense of the music that you ar; playing wi . 
improve, for you cannot read music note by. note, but 
must take it in ph'rase by phrase. 

When you read a book you do not read evsry letter 
in every word, you do not even read each word but 
guess at half of what you are reading, being helped 
by your knowledge of spelling and grammar When 
vou read aloud, have you ever noticed how often you 
say “the” instead of “a,” or some similar mistake? I 
is not that you cannot read the word, it is because you 
have guessed wrongly. 

In listening to a play the same thing is true. 1 he 
ear catches onlv a few of the words, the mind sup¬ 
plies the missing ones from our experience of what 
thev should be. If you have ever attended a play in a 
language with which ‘you .are familiar, but have not a 
reallv every-dav, intimate acquaintance, you will fully 
realize-the truth of this, fti our music reading exactly 
the same laws and principles hold true. We must 
guess at a great part of what we play, and we must 
guess at a great part of what we hear. 

Some people have naturally a good ear. catching the 
phrases and chord relationships easily; such are talented: 
others who have not got the same inborn ability can 
acquire it, and the genius,can vastly improve it, by ear 
training, the ability to recognize chords and intervals 
as to name when hearing them played, recognizing 
their effect when seeing them written, and a thorough 
knowledge of theory; harmony, counterpoint, composi¬ 
tion. How in the wide world can you expect to play 
a fugue unless you know how the voices travel? how 
can you phrase a melody unless you understand its 
construction? These things are all of the greatest 
necessity to the musician ; of course, the piano pounder 
does not need tljese things. he is-much too intelligent 
and far top mucf) of a gepius to learn to do anything 
besides move his fingers;up and down as fast as pos¬ 
sible and with as much noise as possible! Have you 


ever met a good composer who was a bad sight-read,r? 

Uo you know (hat generally the greatest pianists and 
executants of all time have done something as <'"n- 
posers? Perhaps you have heard of tile compositions 
of these virtuosi: Bach, Handel, Scarlatti, Mozart, 
dementi, Beethoven, Mendelssohn. Chopin, Liszt, 
Brahms, Rubinstein. Busoni, Godowsky, Hotmann, 

Paderewski; the list is endless. 

It would seem that if a man can compose well lie 
can execute better than lus fellows. Perhaps the two 
most notable exceptions were Wagner and Berlmz. but 
both of these made up for their lack in tins respect 
by their ability as conductors, and that is a wry real 
form of virtuosity! Take the name of any pianist of J 
prominence, and you will find that he is at least some- -i 
thing of a composer, generally a good one. I Hardly 
think that any person who once grasps that idea will 
continue to look upon the study of theory as uncssen- 5 
tial, or give as an excuse for the neglect of tins most 
important study the reason that they desire in be a 
concert pianist, not a composer or a teacher. \\ , might 
also mention that, despicable as is the profv-sion of 
teaching to these “coming" pianists, almost e\ery great 
pianist has his class of pupils. If more teachers im¬ 
pressed upon their pupils how necessary it is to study 
theory, we would have far less of this awrul, unin¬ 
telligent “key bouncing” that we get so much of every 
day of our life. 

If you cannot afford to buy the music for reading, 
there are always public libraries, and some of these 
have a small but growing collection of music. You 
can easily obtain a special card to pursue your studies 
in this line, which will enable you to keep a piece ot 
music out for the space of six months. ) on might 
perhaps even make your friends of use; making an 
arrangement by which you can exchange music, of 
course, returning it after you have finished. 

If you have any musical friends who arc willing. the 
best thing that you can do is to invest in some duet 
books, or perhaps the public library has some, sliiftittg 
around so that each of you has a chance to playl»! 
the treble and the bass parts. COUNT AND LISTEN. 
Try to keep your eyes on the music, you don’t get your 
notes from the keyboard; your sense of locality shou 
be developed enough- to enable you to do this after a 
fair amount of practice and study. 

So always remember that, just as in reading a boo 
your knowledge of grammar and spelling help you. J : 
so in music will your knowledge of theory help you- ^ 
not forget that musicians are not born in perf ec 
but only become such by the hardest and most exac i 
kind of work. 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 571 

THE ETUDE 




Secrets of the Success of Great Musicians 

By EUGENIO DI P1RANI 


Jules Massenet 

(1842-1912) 



There is hardly another figure in the history of music 
which can better than Jules Massenet be taken as an in¬ 
spiring model by young and old musicians. His genius 
of course cannot be imitated; but his pertinacity in 
work should be a guiding star for all ambitious artists. 
Since early youth he had formed the habit of getting up 
at four o’clock in the morning and of working incessantly 
until midday. He used to labor sixteen hours a day, sleep 
six hours and the meals and the dressing took the rest of 
his time. 4 

The director of the French Opera once said .to 
Massenet: “My dear Master, tell me the secret of your 
abnormal creative ability. You listen to singers, you 
attend every rehearsal and besides you are professor 
a 1 the Conservatoire. When do you find time to work?” 
"When you are asleep,” replied Massenet. And even 
when not actually composing, he was always in search of 
inspiring subjects, he was travelling in foreign countries 
to direct and witness the performance of his operas. 


Early Struggles 

For this fabulous activity is surely the chief secret of 
Massenet’s unprecedented artistic success. It is only 
through such tireless energy that work of great power 
and scope can be produced. 

His motto was: “I have never been able to let my 
mind lie idle.” . . • . • 

His youth was connected with material difficulties. 
In 1851, when he was 9 years old, after having undergone 
an examination he was admitted as a pupil of the Con¬ 
servatoire. His parents having taken him with them to 
Chambery, he escaped from the paternal homestead and 
started for Paris without a sou. He tried to give lessons, 
he played the piano in one of the cafes of Belleville, and 
later on he was employed in the orchestra of the Theatre 
Lyrique as kettle-drummer. 

He was living in an attic of a large building from 
which he could enjoy whiffs from the orchestra which 
escaped from the popular concerts that Pasdeloup con¬ 
ducted in the Cirque Napoleon every Sunday; and from 
his perch he applauded with feverish joy the works of 
Berlioz and of Wagner, his “gods”, as Massenet called 


For the competition of the Institute the candidates had 
to reside at the Institute and to pay the rent of a piano, 
wnieh was twenty francs. Massenet could not afford the 
expense and he resolved to do without. Fortunately he 
never needed its help in composing. His neighbors bothered 
him by pounding on their pianos and singing at the top of 
their lungs. However, Massenet won over his six competitors. 
The judges, Berlioz. Thomas and Auber awarded him the 
much coveted Prix de Rome. 


Studies in Rome 

Massenet went to the Villa Medici in Rome together 
with the young painters, sculptors and architects who 
were also winners of the prize. The carnival festivities 
at Rome were just ending with their Bacchanalian revel¬ 
ries and Massenet with his companions spent the day in 
throwing confetti and flowers at all the lovely Roman 
girls who replied with bewitching smiles from their 
balconies on the Corso. Massenet writes in his memoirs 
that he never could forget these types of rare, sparkling 
and fascinating beauty. 

In that time Rome may not have offered to the young 
students who were sent there from the French govern¬ 
ment much to improve their musical education; but the 
azure sky, the alluring black eyes, the atmosphere sat¬ 
urated with joy and enthusiasm, gave them an inspiration 
such as no teaching and no severe training could ever 
impart. One notices the influence of this bewitching 
atmosphere as well in the early works of Massenet as 
in the immortal creations of Thomas, Gounod, Berlioz, 
Bizet and others who also were benefited by the award of 
the Grand Prix. 


In Kome Massenet met a beautiful girl who had come to 
the Eternal Pity on a sight-seeing trip. She had been recom¬ 
mended to Liszt so that he might select for her a musician 
capable of directing her studies. Liszt proposed Massenet 
whose reluctance in accepting was overcome by the young 


girl’s charm—so much so. that two years later she became 

1 le \Vhen °baS J in°"paris! Massenet could not refrain from 
exclaiming: “What a contrast between the eternally beau¬ 
tiful sky of Italy which I have just left and the one i see 
again, so dark, gray and sullen!” 


His first experience with French music publishers 
was not very encouraging. He took his “Poeme d’Avril” 
to Chaudens, Flaxland, and Brandus, but all showed him 
out. Only the young Georges Hartmann had faith in him. 
Massenet, however, did not have from his first publication 
either honor or money. 


in front of him with his fingers opened out. His open 
hands won for this remarkable tenor the nickname: 
“Cinque e cinque fanno died” (Five and live make ten). 

While he was in Milan the poet Zanardini read him a 
scenario in four acts, on the story of “Herodias, which 
inspired Massenet to one of his- future operas. 

On his return to Paris he was offered the place of 
professor of counterpoint, fugue and composition at 
the Conservatoire to replace Francois Bazin. 

As a Teacher 


First Successes 

His sacred drama, “Marie Magdaleine,” was given 
at the Odeon under Edouard Cotonne’s direction but 
Massenet had to leave the next day for Italy. The first 



echo of this first performance reached him in Naples in 
the form of a letter from Ambroise Thomas which I 
give in full as it contains golden words which should be 
taken at heart by every musician: 

“Paris, April 12, 1873. 

“I cannot postpone telling you, my dear friend, 
how pleased I was last evening and how happy I was at 
your fine success. It is at once a serious, noble work, full 
of feeling. It is of our times; but you have proved that 
one can walk the path of progress and still remain clear, 
sober and restrained. 

“You have known how to move because you 
have been moved yourself. 

“I was carried away like every one else, indeed, 
more than any one else. 

“You have expressed happily the lovely poetry 
of that sublime drama. 

“In a mystical subject where one is tempted to 
fall into abuse of somber tones and severity of style, 
you have shown yourself a colorist while retaining charm 
and clearness.” 

After having spent several years in the completion of 
the “Roi de Lahore,” he writes : “Finishing a work is to 
bid goodby to the indescribable pleasure which the labor 
gives one.” 

This work was given first at the Paris Opera and 
afterwards at the Teatro Regio in Turin. Massenet 
writes of the famous tenor, Fanselli, who had a superb 
voice but a mannerism of spreading his arms wide open 


He gave his courses at the conservatory twice a week. 
He felt proud and happy to sit in the-same class room 
where he had been a student, now as master. And as the 
pupils seemed nearly of his own age he said to therii: 
“You will have but one companion more who will try to 
be as good a pupil as you are yourselves.” 


However, the pupils showed him deferential affection. 
He continued for eighteen years to be both a friend and 
a patron to a considerable number of young composers. .He 
rejoiced in their success, especially as they won each year 
in the contest in fugue; and he confessed that this ten-titng 
was Very useful to himself as it obliged hull to ic-nine 
o the task of finding quickly what should be done 
e rigorous precepts of Cherubini. About every yeai 
md Prix de Rome was awarded to the pupils of his 




In 1900 he received a parchment with the signature 
of more than five hundred of his old pupils. The pages 
were bound into an octavo volume. The signatures were 
preceded by the following lines: 

“Dear Master! 

“Happy at your nomination as Grand Officer of 
the Legion of Honor, your pupils unite in offering you 
the evidence of their deep and affectionate gratitude.” 

Among the names of the Grand Prix of the Institute 
who showed their gratitude in this way were: Hille- 
macher, Henre Raubaud, Gustave Charpentier, Renaldo 
Hahn, Enesco, Bemberg and Laparre. 

One must own that these facts give a grandiose idea 
of the earnestness of musical studies in Paris. Matters 
are taken there very seriously and thoroughly. Among 
teachers and pupils we find names of great prominence, 
names like Berlioz, Gounod, Thomas, Bizet, Sairit- 
Saens, Massenet, names with a mighty good sound, the 
pride not only of France but of the whole musical world. 

American Artistic Hopes 

How must we feel here in America, in our own 
glorious country, where we do not yet have a national 
conservatory, although there has been much talk of 
establishing one. And, even if there were one, where 
would be the teachers who would bring to the institution 
the treasures of genius, of knowledge, of experience, 
the prestige of an international name? 

It is true we are a comparatively young nation and 
it will take some time before we are enabled to do some¬ 
thing of the same magnitude as in France. Money is 
net enough. With this one can only erect imposing 
buildings, large concert halls—the container. The most 
important part lies in the contents —the right men! 

Massenet made several trips to Italy with the purpose 
to prepare and superintend the various performances of 
his opera “Roi de Lahore” at Milan, Venice, Trieste, and 
other cities. These wanderings were very little to the 
taste of Massenet; but the reason, he said, was that “at 
the beginning of our career we have to give hints to the 
orchestra, the stage manager, the artists, the costumers; 
explain the why and wherefore of each scene, give the 
right tempi and other details. 


And here let me say that also the music publishers 
ought to know something about the intentions of the com¬ 
posers. The practice of many publishers in judging of the 
music of a composer only from reading the score without 
consulting the composer’s ideas and if possible listening to 
his own interpretation, is a mistake. These publishers say 
that the music, when accepted, must take care of itself 
without the help of the composer; but the publisher or 
his adviser cannot appreciate the spirit and the possi¬ 
bilities of a new work without knowing the intentions of the 
author. The publisher would be only benefited by the dis¬ 
closure of the veiled treasures of the composition. 





































Page 572 SEPTEMBER 1921 

Vicissitudes of Herodiade 

The score of “Herodiade” was finished at the beginning 
of 1887. The three years he had devoted to this work 
had been one interrupted joy to the composer. Massenet 
relates the conversation he had with Vancorbeil the 
director of the Opera. 

}* ‘My dear director, as the Opera has been opened to 
my “Roi de Lahore,” permit me to speak of a new work, 
“Herodiade”.’ 

“ ‘Who is the librettist?’ . T 

“ 'Paul Millet, a man of considerable talent, whom 1 
like immensely.’ , 

“ 1 like him immensely too; but with him one needs a 

^"‘A^carcassier!’. I replied with utter astonishment, 

A carcassier! What kind of an animal is that? 

“ ‘A carcassier,’ added the eminent director, seme 
tiously, is one who knows how to fix up in solid fashion 
the carcass of a piece; and I may add that 3™* ar ® "° 
enough of a carcassier in the strictest sense of the word. 
Bring me another work and the Opera will be open o 

y0? From this enigmatic answer Massenet understood only 
too well that the Opera was closed to him. 

Calebresi, the director of the Theatre de le Monnaie, 
at .Brussels, was of different opinion. He offered to 
Massenet to produce it at once at his theatre. 

The first private audience took place in Brussels, l 
the foyer of the theatre, before the director, the publisher 
' Hartmann, and the artists selected to create the partA 
„ This masterwork had a dazzling success and passed 
sdon the hundredth performance. Its most popular aria 
"U est doux,” has become a favorite concert unmber of 
every soprano. , 

His next opera “Manon”, was performed more than 
800 times in the Paris Opera Comique and among me 
artists who have taken the part were Mary Garden, 
Getaldine Farrar and Lina Cavalieri. 

The charming American singer, Sibyl Sanderson, was 
the interpreter of his “Esclarmonde”. Massenet was 
utterly fascinated by her talent and by her personality. 

Massenet’s Humor 

In his memoires Massenet writes of being present at 
Caruso’s debut in Milan and confesses to a flagrant joke 
he played while he was in that city, at a dinner of Son- 
zogno, the publisher. Everyone knew of the strained re¬ 
lations between him and Ricordi. He slipped into the dm- 
| n o- room ‘before anyone of the guests had gone in ana 
plgced under Sonogno’s napkin an Orsini bomb which was 
only of-cardboard, he had bought from the confec- 

tl9 Beside this inoffensive explosive he placed Ricordi’s 
card. The joke was a great success. 

On the occasion of the first performance of his opera 
“Cendrillon” in 1899, Gounod sent to Massenet the follow¬ 
ing lines: “A thousand congratulations, my dear friend, 
on your latest fine success. The devil! Well you go at 
such a pace one can scarcely keep up with you. One sees 
how astonished a fellow artist was at the fabulous work¬ 
ing power of Massenet. This opera was given also in 
America. The following cablegram was sent to Mas¬ 
senet: “Cendrillon here, success phcno menal. the 


last word was too long and the sending office had cut it in 
two, to m^ it morl profitable for the company 

Massenet’s talent was of a rather feminine nature. He 
lacked depth of thought and strength to S ra PP le SUCC ; S 
fully with Biblical subjects. At the sametime th 
distinct element of poetry noticeable in all h 's wo f ks ana 
a peculiar sensuous charm is prominent in most of h s 
compositions. To these qualities he added a nchly 
colored and varied instrumentation and an always 
interesting and often original harmonic ^atment 
Few musicians can touch him in the art of ha ““ n “S 
the orchestra. At the time when he was studying at the 
Conservatoire he astonished everyone by the prodigious 
amount of work he got through and the ease with which 
he was able to compose. . 

Once while Massenet was working on his ^ Te¬ 
resa”, he had to telephone to his librettist, Jules Claret.e 
about some difficulty in the final scene. He called him up 
and shouted: At 

“Cut Therese’s throat and it will be all right. At 
this moment Massenet heard an unknown voice crying 
excitedly (somebody was listening at the wire) : * 

if I only knew who you are, you scoundrel, I would de¬ 
nounce you to the police. A crime like that! Who is 
to be the victim?” 

Suddenly Claretie’s voice: . ... 

“Once her throat is cut she will be put in the cart with 
her husband. I prefer that to poison.” 

The other man’s voice: 

“Qh that’s too much! Now the rascals want to poison 
her. I’ll call the superintendent, I want an inquiry. 

A buzzing ensued; then blissful calm. With a sub- 
scriber roused to such a pitch Massenet and Claretic 
ran the chance of a bad quarter of an hour. 

Massenet relates a conversation one of Ms friend_s wtio 
Tnd lost nn uncle a millionaire, hau witn tne una .ridB. • 
i.t,, i, the latter '‘Monsieur wants a first-class funeral, 
he will have the entire church hung in black and with the 
arms of the deceased, the Opera orchestra, the leading sing¬ 
ers, the most imposing catafalque—according to price. 

“Then ^ir,^i^wilTbe second class; the orchestra fr °“ 
Opera Comique, second rate singers— according to amount 
paid.” 

Further hesitation. , . m 

Whereupon the undertaker in a sad tone ^ he Lv ' ” 
be third class but 1 warn you, Monsieur, it will not be gay . 

A story is told of how one evening when he was dining 
out, the mistress of the house insisted upon making him 
listen to her daughter’s playing. At the end of the per¬ 
formance, upon being asked his opinion, Massenet grave y 
remarked that it was quite evident that the young lady 
had received a thorough Christian education. Why? 
ejaculated the surprised parents. “Because she so scru¬ 
pulously observes the precept of the evangelist—her 
right hand knoweth not what her left hand doeth. 

It will only be necessary at the end of this article to 
mention briefly the points which are most prominent m 
Massenet’s career. , . . . , 

-Indefatigable wofk: into which he put his whole soul. 
‘ —Exquisite amiability and kindness to his fellow 
musicians, therefore he had few if any enemies among 

ONE OF THE MOST EMINENT 
FRENCH COMPOSERS 


First Aid to Interpretation 

By Anna Hurst 


That “Americans see through their fingers is in 
some parts a colloquialism. Which reminds us that some 
people “hear through their eyes.” This latter should be a 
part of the musician's equipment, as much as to be able to 
u^e the ears. They should be among the most observant 

° Perhaps the following incident will serve as lllu tratiom 
A brisk breeze was noticed to be whirling a piece of 
paper about, first to one side of the street and then to the 
other, till it was in a sorry state. The story of the piece 
of paper in the wind helped a young pupil to catch the 
meaning of the scampering up and down the page of the 
notes in a lively little piece called “May Breezes. 

In my own experience, in a certain piece my teacher 


wanted a peculiar rhythm, “a throb” he called it. This 
never was quite understood till, on crossing one of the 
great lakes, my ear caught the th’rob of the great engines 
propelling the boat, which gave a conception of what my 
master had felt and desired. After this experience, that 
particular movement was easy to get. 

The free and easy swaying motion of roller skating has 
brought about a feeling of abandonment in a certain 
“capriccio” in a way that nothing else suggested. Doubt¬ 
less many have had similar experiences. 

Quoting again from the same teacher, “Listen care¬ 
fully, not only to your own music but to every sound 
about you.” To this might be added, “Note minutely 
everything within sight.” 


One Minute with Mendelssohn 


I know nothing more fatal than the abuse or neglect 
of a divine art. 

It is idle to talk of the defects of music; progress 
and reform—that’s the question. 

' I know of no aim more noble than that of giving music 
to one’s native language and to one’s native country. 

The first requisite in a musician is that he should 
respect, acknowledge, and do homage to what is great 
and sublime in his art. 


If music is to be ybur profession, you cannot too early 
accustom yourself to regard the subject-matter of a 
composition as of greater moment and importance than 
its outward form. 

What a divine calling is music! Though everything 
else may appear shallow and repulsive,,even the smallest 
task in music is so absorbing, and carries us from town, 
country, earth, and all worldly things, that it is truly 
a blessed gift of God. 


THE ETUDE 

The Art of Accent 

By Harold Mynning 

Accent is the heart beat of music. Yet many never 
learn to play with freedom and surety because they 
lev™ have mastered this vital principle of their art. 

Accents are guide posts,-so to speak to lead the way 
through a composition. How often we hear an allegro or 
So played in a jumbled manner, simply because no 
clear accent sustains the rhythm. .jffl 

But how is true accent to be acquired. Unfortun¬ 
ately, like everything else connected with panopa„ 
it is a slow process. Some seem to be born with a feel¬ 
ing for it, while others acquire it only with difficulty. 
Scales, practiced in groups of two, three and four notes, 
with a good accent on the first note of each group, help 
to develop it. Use the metronome if possible. 

Take, for example, the right hand work of the beauti¬ 
ful Fantasia Impromptu in C-sharP MmorJyChogin 
The accent falls on the first of each group of four notes. 
If the accented note is practiced louder than *e °thers, 
it is likely to result in a jumpy, mechanical manner of 
playing. Simply to stress the first note would be better. 
Practice slowly and hold the accented note a trifle longer 
than the others. ., . ■ 

In working for accents, one thing to avoid is a jar. ing 
motion of the hand. This interferes with smoothness 
and velocity. , , . „ 

Attend recitals of the celebrated pianists. Obser\e 
which notes they accent and which they do not. 

Finally, study more carefully your own accents. Often 
the secret of much difference between the poor and 
good players lies in their uses of accent. 


Things to Remember About the 
Mordent 

By Allan ]. Eastman 

Following is the proper sign for the mordent. 

It is always played with 'the auxiliary tone below the 
principal tone, thus: 


Ex. 1 



The rule is that the auxiliary tone is a half step lower 
than the principal tone, except: 

a. When the note affected by the mordent is pre¬ 
ceded or followed by a note one whole tone lower than 
the note itself. 

b. When the note affected by the mordent is either the 
third or the seventh degree of the scale. 

A natural or a sharp under the sign affects the 
auxiliary note correspondingly, but does not affect the 
principal note. 

The Double Mordent 

The double mordent is merely an expansion of the 
single mordent by the addition of two notes, thus: 


Ex. 2 



The Inverted Mordent 

What is known in English as the inverted mordent 
is called in German the Pralltriller and in French the 
Pince renverse. Note that in this the perpendicular line 
is missing from the sign. In this embellishment the 
auxiliary note is the next degree of the scale above the 
principal note. 


£sJ3Qj 


The word mordent comes from the old French word 
meaning to bi e, morderc In German it had the same 
significance (Eeisser). We might infer from this that 
in playing the notes should be bitten off sharply, as-n 
were. Composers in the past laid great stress upon the 
accuracy in playing such signs. Rossini, for instancy 
heard a performance of his overture to William V 
some thirty years after it was performed and was greaW 
excited because the violoncello played a trill with t 
auxiliary note one-half step above the principal note in¬ 
stead of one whole step. 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 573 

T1IE ETUDE 




The Teachers’ Round Table 

Conducted by N. J. COREY 


n,s department * destpned to hc,p tde teacher upon 

-Who, to Teach," etc., and not technical PTobt^s pcMnlns to »natcut^ r. 
History, etc., all of which properly belong to the Musi f** Qu inquiries 
department. Full name and address must accompany all inquiries. 



What’s What in Instructors. 

“With all my youngsters I find the new Beginner’s 
Book is splendid. They all seem to love it. But 
to be frank I do not have so universal a success 
with First Steps. Can .you recommend anything to 
substitute in place of this? Also what should I use 
after Duvernoy’s Opus 176?” N. D. 

Your experience is similar to that of nearly all good 
teachers, especially those who have many to teach and 
continue the work indefinitely. It was never intended 
that the books you mention should be suitable to every¬ 
one under all conditions. Ultimate perfection along 
such lines will always be difficult so long as human nature 
remains a variable quantity. I know of nothing that 
excels the Beginner’s Book, hence am glad to learn of 
your approval of it for so many pupils. Knowing that 
First Steps was not suitable for all conditions, although 
most admirable in others, a direct sequel to Begintu’r’s 
Book was written, entitled, The Student’s Book. Have 
you tried this? I think it will solve your problems. First 
Steps proves valuable very often with adult pupils who 
resent some of the child methods of early books. This 
book leaves the way open more for the teacher to con¬ 
duct the work in whatever manner he thinks best. You 
should supply yourself with elementary teaching material, 
studies, pieces, etc., such as you see announced from 
time to time in The Etude, make yourself thoroughly 
familiar with it so as to be able to use it m varying 
the work with your pupils as it may seem best. For 
example, with some of your little ones, a book like 
Cramm’s New Rhymes and Tunes for Little Pianists w. 
prove a fine stimulant to their interest. Besides, not al 
pupils have the innate ability to progress with an equal 
degree of rapidity. When your pupils have finished 
Duvernoy’s Opus 176, you will find it profitable to take 
them directly into the first book of the Czerny-L.ebling 
Selected Studies, omitting some of the earlier ones. This, 
with the Standard Graded Course, and well selected 
pieces, will carry you along. 

At Forty-one 

“1. I had lessons for one year when I was twelve 
Three years ago, at the age of forty-one, I again 
began taking lessons. My fingers are getting very 
nimble and doing very well, and am Just limshing 
Mendelssohn’s Spring Song. I readacciiratey.but 
not raDidlv. What can I do to obtain facility in 
this? I would like to be able to read church and 
Sunday school songs at first slgb Ti t * mltmpss w hen~ 

“2. I suffer exceedingly from nervousness w 

w s buf tia J c m z e vl ^rx 

forget utterly. I have never I* made a failure, 
UnecelsaryThat iThould try to play without my 
notes?"—E. N. 

E. N.’s letter was very long, far out-running our space 
But we are glad to present the gist of it, as E. N. seems 
to be an exception to usual experience We are otten 
asked if satisfactory progress can be made, after twe y- 
five Our usual answer has been that it is the average 
experience of teachers that such progress is not made 
after the muscles and ligaments become mature and fixed 
Here now is an exception, a pupil of forty-one reports 
•that she is getting along satisfactorily, a pupd who began 
in the first grade after waiting from twelve to thi ty 
nine before resuming study. There is hope, therefore, 
for those who are starting late and are willing to work 
patiently and with persistent application. We shall be 
glad to hear that E. N. has achieved a fair measure of 
virtuosity later, which will be a still greater body ow 
to any answer we have given before to a similar question. 
As to reading I would suggest that some of the col¬ 
lections of first and second grade music be obtained, 
which the publisher has on sale at very moderate prices. 
E. N. should take a good look at each piece and try to 
form a conception of just how it should go, and then 
bravely attack it, playing to the end without stopping for 
mistakes. Try to learn to grasp complete phrases at a 
glance. Facility in reading them quickly will come alter 
a few weeks or months’ practice. Do not play any 


piece more than twice before going to the next. After 
playing the book through, read it through again. Then 
go on to another. Do the same with your hymnal and 
S. S. song book. In six months you will read so much 
more quickly that you will not know yourself. 

For nervousness I would refer you to a symposium on 
this subject in the July number of the Etude. of last 
summer. To ask you to play without notes, however 
seems a good deal like standardizing teaching models 
in the same manner as Ford cars are standardized. Only 
one model and all cars stamped out to conform to it. it 
would cost Ford millions to change the machinery in his 
plant SO as to put out a new model. But it ought not 
to be a heavy tax on your advisers to recognize that con¬ 
ditions are so different with you that memorizing for 
a public recital is entirely unnecessary. With young 
pupils memorizing is an essential part of study, both 
for mental training and possible use that may be made 
of the art in the future. But there is no likelihood of 
your becoming, a public performer. Therefore for the 
little you may desire to do along that line, the act should 
be made as pleasant and easy, for you as possible. 1 he 
majority of children play just as comfortably without 
notes if not more so, after having become accustomed 
to doing without them, a habit that continues throughout 
their playing careers. In piano study the consideration 
of the individual instance is always the important ele- 

Beginning Problems with Young Teachers. 

“1 I use the Beginners and Student’s Books. 

At what point with these two Would you use 
Mathews’ Grade J? , . . . . . 

“2 The majority of children beginners let their 
thumbs hang off the keyboard. What r, ' mf ' dj ' ''' oa 1 <1 , 

you advise? It seems to reqijjre constant remind- 

111 “3 Would you use Czerny with the Student’s 
Book with a talented nine year old pupil, or is scale 
work enough with this book? 

“4. How can one tell when the wrist is stiff in 
a piano player? 

(A human one, I mean !) o. 

1 A teacher should learn tp exercise keen discretion 
in such matters. Pupils vary so greatly in every factor 
that influences the study of music, such as natural apti¬ 
tude, taste, studious application, physical constitution, 
etc that it is almost useless for a teacher to try and 
conform to a hard and fast rule that will apply uni orm- 
lv to all As a general rule, however, with ch dren 
I should say that the Beginner’s Bpok is about all that 
'is needed, except you may wish to stimulate the , ^ e 
by adding a well selected but short piece. Children 
seem to grade their real advancement. from the time 
thev are given a “piece,’! especially it it is sneer 
music.” Older pupils pass over the rudimentary work 
much more rapidly, owing to the greater matanly 
the intelligence. All teachers need to ^crfpnize the 
psychological fact that the ..brain faculties have no exist 
ence in infancy, but are all a process of gradual budd¬ 
ing. When you teach the little tots you are not only 
showing them how to play on the keyboard, but you 
are also helping to build their brams and Processes as 
well. Hence you can assume but little on what they 
already know. Adult pupils sometimes accomplish the 
elementary stages in what seems to be, comparatively 
speaking, “almost no time.” They frequently come to an 
impasse, however, beyond which they are unableto go, 
showing that they have very nearly reached the limit 
of their inborn capacity for music. Meanwhile the 
slowly progressing child will advance steadily, year in 
and year out, and in many cases rise to high attainment. 
The brain will develop with what it is fed on. this 
does not lessen the difficulty, however, with those child¬ 
ren whose inborn capacity is almost' at zero. 

One can only make the hazard, therefore, that the 
average pupil would better not take up the Standard 
Graded Course until the. Student’s Book is entered upon. 
In this case some of the elementary exercises may be 


omitted, and experience will guide you to ^Hous omis¬ 
sions with pupils with differing degrees of talent It 
you have plenty of material at hand, you can more* 
telligently plan your work to fit individual pecuhant es 
selecting and omitting accordingly. Study mdividua 
^ constantly, until you cultivate keen discernment as 

>»-*■* rrT„ 
J5=? £r SSVffl =• 

many of their little pieces and etudes as POssible Al 
technical exercises, scales, etc., must be done w.thou 
notes. Constantly instill into your pupils he idea ffiat 
after they have learned a g-ven piece or tudy by 
and do not need to look ac the notes, that they a 
just ready to undertake the most important part of the 
practice the manner in whim they hold their hands 
while playing. That they cannot give them atten t'° n 
to this until they can fix it completely upon the hahds 
while practicing. Constantly pound this into themMtot 
the most important point, how they use hands, fingers 
etc comes when they have learned a piece well enough 
so they need to think of nothing else when they prac¬ 
tice As a supplementary aid, let them hold the thumb 
key down while practicing various five finger exercises 
which you will find in your books. Then the following 
proves excellent because running up and down the keys 
stimulates the interest. This should be taught to them 
by dictation. Use the same reverse order for the left 
hand, that is, proceeding down the keyboard. Be sure 
the thumb holds down the half note. 



3 I would not introduce the Czemy-Liebling until the 
second grade is reached. Here again elementary work 
may be omitted, unless needed as a review for special 

%. By .observing that the. pupil holds the wrist stiff, 
and listening to the hard tone produced. Try to gently 
manipulate the player’s wrist while the hand is m action 
on keyboard, and you will feel that it is stiff. Usually 
the eyesight is sufficient. 

School Credits 

“May I have some enlightenment as to^how to 
examine pupils desiring High School Credits- I 
give an outline of the first year used here, second 
semester form, which is different from that with 
which I am familiar. The pupil is to take one 
lesson weekly, practicing eight hours a week ror 
four and one-half months. How much shoulfl be 
required of the pupil at the examination ?”—S. E. 

The conduct of examinations should not differ from 
any exercise of that sort. You should have an idea of 
what should be expected from the pupil in the line of 
touch, accuracy, tone qualify, shading, tempo, and gen¬ 
eral expression, and make your markings for each as 
your pupil plays. Your form demands the minor scales 
and chromatic scales with hands separately and together, 
legato and staccato touches, broken chords, octaves and 
repeated notes, all at a given metronomic tempo. This 
requirement you can easily follow. You would not ex- 
pect your candidate to play from all the studies listed, 
but simply a couple from whichever his or her teacher 
had elected to use with a given pupil. The same with 
the pieces. Two or three of the pieces should be asked 
for; and from these you would form your 'judgment. 
This is the usual manner of conducting examinations, 
and I see no reason why it should be changed in the case 
of school credits. 












































THE ETUDE 


Page 5U SEPTEMBER 1921 

Some Practical Ideas on Starting 
Beginners 


Horizontal Themes 

By Flora J. Manlove 


Here and There in Music 

By The Recorder 


By Robert A. Davidson 


If you are a young teacher the best way to start your 
beginners should interest you. 

The starting of beginners offers a great field for you 
because every player has to begin. 

You can easily make a specialty with this little 
“Method” that the writer will now put you wise to. 

If you turn to the September Etude, page 554, you 
will find the writer’s most successful way of teaching 
the bass notes. You should adopt this way. Then there 
will be no further trouble from your pupils striking 
an E key in the bass because they learned for the right 
hand that the bottom line is E. 

Now, your beginner having learned some notes, how 
will you handle him? Memory exercises at the key¬ 
board are good. But pupils forget them sometimes. This 
is why the notes must come early. 

Here is the best way to obtain finger practice for your 
beginner, and you need use only one note for each mel¬ 
ody exercise: 


3 13 j 255|313|255|424|353|153|I--| etc. 

Place the third finger on the key indicated, and in a 
five-finger position, play the proper fingers as these 
figures indicate, from left to right. 

This little exercise only requires your beginner to rec¬ 
ognize the note on the bottom line. It is spaced, as you 
see, in waltz rhythm. 

Take another note, such as: 

2 3 2 5 | 2 3 2 5 | 1 3 2 5 | 3 4 5 - | etc. 

This is spaced for march time. It only requires your 
pupil to recognize the second line note, and is played the 
same way, in a five-finger position. 

The five-finger position is the beginner’s position. For 
the other line and space notes you can find suitable ex¬ 
ercises on melodies for this purpose in the publisher’s 
instruction material. 

After this teach the use of two fingers at a time by ar¬ 
ranging such a five-finger exercise as this: 

3 4 5 | 4 3 13 3 | | 

I 2| 5 12-1 etc. 

12 3|21 (I 1 I [ 

Train the left hand fingers the same way, with the 
use of bass notes, one at a time 

As a young teacher, you may need new pupils. This 
little “Method” will help you get them, for wherever you 
may be you can demonstrate the success of this method 
right on the spot. 

A parent is always interested to taiow how you pro¬ 
pose to teach her child. You can readily explain to any 
parent, as the writer is always successful in doing, how 
this teaches one note at a time. And by the use of the 
five-finger position gives practice and training to the 
fingers in a very easy and simple manner. Before being 
able to play by note your beginner must surely obtain 
control of his fingers, so tliey will play the proper key. at 
the proper time. These one-note melody exercises do 
just this, in the easiest and simplest manner possible. 
tCall this work your “melody exercises.” 

It is only a “method” because it does for you what you 
want, and is the logical way of doing it. 

You will find this work so satisfactory that your only 
difficulty will be to supply enough material for home 
practice. * 


Increasing the Expansion 

Mrs. E. G. Taylor, of Washington, D. €., sends the 
following suggestion in regard to the question raised in 
The Etude last December as to a means of increas¬ 
ing the expansion of the hands, so that oetaves would 
become more easily compassed. 

“I oner a suggestion I have found helpful with pupils. 
I have them practice the following exercise;— 



Holding down the two fingers for the short period in¬ 
dicated, before moving to the next position, helps to 
stretch the hand through the centre, and after a short 
time the pupil can easily stretch an octave. Of course 
such exercises are dangerous, and liable to, strain the 
muscles if practiced! too> long at a time. Heme, oncee 
up the . Octave with the second and third fingers is 
enough for the moment, proceeding, then to other work. 
A little later treat the third and fourth fingers in the 
same manner, relax, and practice other work. 


In playing a selection of fugal form, when the theme 
is given out by one ”voice” and then heard from 
another, until there are three or four running melodi , 
the pupil is liable to make the effect like this | | | I 




Playing each part through separately, and listening 
carefully, will aid in making them “flow” properly. 


Genius and Fingering 

By May Hamilton Helm 

Advice of Genius is often thought too high to attain 
to, though one may heed the counsel of an ordinary 
mortal. Even the most famous teacher complains that 
pupils will not take advice about fingering. 

We are too much inclined to experiment even after 
others have blazed safe and sane traits for us. Piano 
pupils learn—sometimes too late!—that correct habits 
in fingering are of more importance than was dreamed 
of in their philosophy. Nor is it possible to establish 
habits by doing things differently each time. 

That correct fingering is intimately and vitally con¬ 
nected with sight-reading seems indisputable. Many 
mistakes occur because the right finger was not ready. 

New converts are generally more zealous than older 
adherents to a faith. Most of my difficulties arose 
from having NO HABITS of fingering and from los¬ 
ing my place by bobbing my bead to see first the music 
then the keyboard. A fellow student, an organist, gave 
me the “tip” that made a good reader of an almost hope¬ 
less case: “Glue your eyes, to the notes—FEEL THE 
KEYS as we do the organ pedals.” 

The very term “sight-reading” implies quickness of 
visiori. A schoolmate who could find words in the dic¬ 
tionary sooner than anyone else, became a fluent, ac¬ 
curate music reader, partly due to this natural rapidity 
of sight-grasp. 

Self-evident facts are often hardest to teach. When 
no fingering is given, one would naturally suppose that, 
if started on the right key, any pupil would play the 
next key with the next finger—lying directly over it. 
But do they do so? Ask any piano teacher. With un¬ 
natural awkwardness some pupils will try to squeeze all 
the fingers together, fringing the thumb next to the 
fifth finger. Necessity for this contraction arises, later 
on, but when five fingers have but five keys to press, 
wouldn’t any one suppose that each finger would take 
the key lying under it? 


To the End of the World 

By Aldo Bellini 

^ Each of us may shine; you fa your small corner, and 

So it goes throughout the world. AH of us ccannot be 
stars of the first magnitude. All of us cannot hold the 
center of the stage in the glaring spotEght that fame 
focuses cm her chosen few. 

What each can do is to. make his work so good of its 
particular kind that it will light the corner of the world 
in which it happens to be executed. Why waste our 
worry on how far the tight shall penetrate. But make 
it intense enough by doing work than which you cannot 
do better, and there is nothing in the universe through 
which it will not penetrate, A high purpose, pursued 
with persistent sincerity, knows no obstacle. Its pow¬ 
er and light will carry yeur personality round the world. 
Take heart, O music’s devotee in seeming obscurity! 

“A Good Idea.” 

By Edna Hudson Duffy 

As we all know, one of the important things in teach¬ 
ing music, and particularly with, the young ones, is to 
keep them interested, by having a change b f or 

them. 

It is a good idea to give them, just before the special 
holidays of the year—Christmas,, Easter, Fourth of J w ty, 
etc—a selection suited for that special time. Have them 
learn all they can about! the composer, and the writing 
of the hymn or piece. So many pupils who. are quite 
advanced, cannot play hymns, welt By using this method 
it will, give them a change,, harm them as. well as some 
good practice. . 


Edward Baxter Perry, the famous blind pianist 
pupil of Liszt and Clara Schumann, will teach next 
at Hood College, Frederick, Maryland, in the Dep arl . 
ment recently reorganized by Dr. J. M. Blose, whose 
book The I’cdal, is well known to Etude readers. Sir 
Edward was knighted many years ago by the hereditary 
Prince of Melusine. He has never made capital of the 
fact that he has been blind from infancy, hi fact, the 
Recorder, in his own boyhood, read Sid Edward’s 
articles in The Etude for years and never knew that' 
the author of Descriptive Analyses of Pianoforte Com¬ 
positions and Stories of Standard Teaclwuj Pieces was 
sightless. Notwithstanding this handicap lie has traveled 
the length and breadth of America, for the most part 
entirely unaccompanied, and has given over three thou¬ 
sand pianoforte recitals, employing a really immense 
repertoire of pieces. Once "the Recorder was invited 
to dine with Sir Edward, at the home of a friend. 
Together with the friend he called at the pianist’s hotel. 
Going down a dimly lighted corridor, we reached 
his room. Knocking on the door we heard a cheerful 
“Come in.” The door opened upon a room in complete 


dressing,” said Sir Edward. 

There in total darkness he walked about the room, 
opening his satchel, his bureau drawers, a I making his 
toilette in a way which made the Reconl realize for 
the first time what total blindness really meant. The 
blackness of the night was his all day id had been 
for a lifetime. 

What do you think of your handicaps, \ me, man, you 
who have all your faculties? If Edward Baxter Perry 
can achieve such an unusual career, notv 'landing the 
greatest of physical afflictions, what may i not accom¬ 


plish ? 


Charles Courboin, master-organist, formerly of tlie 
Anthwerp Cathedral, but now very much \mcricanized, 
and engaged to play the special conceit' n the great 
Wanamaker organs in New York ami i ’biladelphia. 
toured Europe last Summer in company » itli the ever- 
affable director of the Wanainaker com - . Alexander 

Russell, now Dr. Alexander Russell bv , rme of the 
degree of Doctor of Music recently confer I upon him 
by Princeton University, where he is the !’ ofessor of 
Music. The two organists visited many ; the great 
organs of France, Germany and England, and were 
royally entertained by eminent musicians, in i ling Widor 
and Saint-Saens. Mr. Courboin told the Recorder 
recently that at Cologne lie was amazed to find the 
organ in the great Cathedral in a most dilapidated condi¬ 
tion, owing to the fact that many of th< metal pipes 
had been removed to make ammunition. Lwn the huge 
Cathedral bell which thrilled so many Am van visitors 
with its tremendous vibrations, went ;n'«> the melting 
pot. Only in this way can we realize how sorely Ger¬ 
many was pinched and what a terrific effort she made to 
win the war. At Paris, Courboin was present at a 
meeting with Saint-Saens and an aggressive, bombast'c 
American singer, who had induced the eights -six years old 
master to hear her sing My Heart At Thy Street Voice, 
from Samson and Dclila. At the end of a very excruciat¬ 
ing performance indeed, the singer turned to Saint-Saens 
and said: “Now, Master, may I have the great honor of 
an opinion upon my art from the illustrious composer 
of the opera?” 

Saint-Saens excla'med: 

"Madame, you have forced me to the truth; your 
singing is detestable! Awful! Horrible! How can you 
ave the ,audacity to come to me believing that you have 
voice (Waiter, please bring the smelling salts—the 
prima donna is having a fit) 

Incidentally, Saint-Saens has just returned from a 
concert tour of Greece. 


in a later .ssue some personal recollections . 
win be recounted for the first time. 

entovJ 1 y ‘I* f fateSt ma,e sin ^r of all tin 
enjoyed popu ar favor which reminded one of t 
which greeted Jenny Lind. 


not - it \ reach jo music which the other a-Is hat 
so sure. -Charles M. Schwab ^ 


SEPTEMBER 1921 

TENDER REMEMBRANCE 


M. L. PRESTON 

\ n Noetur»c style. Play in the manner of a violin solo,with breadth and feeling. _ 

Ajidantino M.M.# = 72 

























































































































































































































































































































Page 576 SEPTEMBER 1921 


ON THE HEATHER 


TH£ £ TUDt 
HARRY 1 


MOROEAU Play lightly and gracefully. Grade 4. 

In characteristic style,employing a rhythm popularized by Dvorak in his Bumoresq, , 



u b — < |■■ C~~5~r *3 r r irrH*_ C H r T 1 r a~r • 

Jf cresc. ■»—- 


f m U 

? ^ - - J. ' 




a tempo 5 ^-^4 ^ J.*"*' 

i ^ ^ ^ r , an ,tf — ^ - 


tr I tr 1# 

* 1 

/ ‘J 

r 4v,V 7 * --fopN -—; ----- b? 


£- —== 

\\M 9 [ r 1 -■-• 1 - 1 -• r Izrzr 



nJr lH ~ \ m J 4 " _ HT1 

=*= —4= —ss_J?, 



Copyright secure 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Pag? 577 

THE ETUDE 



ALPINE ECHOES 


An excellent little study in shading and in echo effects. Grade 2^ 


C. REINECKE 











































































































































































































































































































































































THE ETUDE 


Page 578 SEPTEMBER ml 


VALSE DE BALLET 




R. S. STOUGHTON 




THE ETUDE 


SEPTEMBER 1921 


Page 579 


SABBATH CALM 


Organ-like and contrapuntal in character with a suggestion of distant bell-chimes. Grade 3. E. F. CHRISTIANI 

Andante sostenuto M.M.J=72 



Copyright 1921 by Theo.Presser Co. 


British Copyright secured 

















































































































































































































































































































































THE ETUDE 


880 smmBls ‘T,wF’S SWEET LONGING 

LO\ & ^ pl iQ a so ng like manner. 

A duet in drawing-room style, with independent work » g^ONDO 


Anda^t£-£on^<5Sspre8sione amoroso 4 J^ 


C.B.CLARK 



Copyright 1921 by Theo. Presser Co. 


British Copyright s' 


THE ETUDE 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 581 


LOVE’S SWEET LONGING 

PRIMO 

And ante c on espressione amoroso m.m.J=7£ 







































































































































































































































































































































































































SEPTEMBER 1921 


Pa ft- 5S3 


mUmi WILHELMINB 

2nd MINUET A L’ ANTIQUE 

A minuet in the old style, played rather slowly with firm ‘ tcCent gjj 0 Qj^j)Q 


the etude 


ANTON STRELEZKI,Op.i7 0 




THE etude 


WILHELMINE 




























































































































































































































































































































































































































































Page 584 SEPTEMBER 1921 


BATTLE OF THE STARS 


In processional march style, suitable for indoor marching, calisthenics etc. A good teaching number also, 


TEE ETUDE 

, Grade 3 JOSEPH ELLIS 



> > 

A | M 

, )[l ^ 

8 4 » » . * 

8 2 14 8 


x is 


' P k ^ 


/ a 

T r r ^ 





MIGNONETTE 



















































































































































































































































































































































































THE ETUDE 

Page 586 SEPTEMBER 1921 

A P IBmJ G. KARGANOFF, Op. 20,No.l 

MELODIb . chief Ivin duet style. These must be brought out careful- 

A fUUh.d .„d very e*pr..,tve modern , 0 »g without word,,with the pr.cip.l vote chr.f.y - 

ly. Grade 5 Moderato M.M. J=TZ 



A | . .^T 4 | J J J 

j 

5 _— r 

4 ^ ""J p-vj- 

AJ* s i 

—-r .... 

^ 4 j ^ p* 



•'f K ^ 

lai^S 

12 « 

^ Vf E 

■ p 

:^r. ? 

« p-■ 




E 


CODA{ 


r p 


F -17 F 














































































































































































































Page 5S8 SEPTEMBER 1921 


All phonographs, all records have been 
weighed on the delicately balanced scales 
of musical knowledge. And in the homes 
of great musicians, both in Europe and 
America, you will find Brunswick — the 
musical world's accepted ideality in 
phonographic expression. 


THE ETUDE 


PHONOGRAPHS 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 589 


the etude 


What They Say 

in High Musical Circles 


A SK musical authorities which phono- 
graph they .prefer. Ask music teachers, 
■*- -““musicians, critics. And the number . 
who say The Brunswick will surprise you. 

Ask which records they prefer, and again 
you will hear The Brunswick. 

And they will tell you, too, that while these 
records are sweeter and more beautiful, on 
. any phonograph, the ideality is attained 
with a Brunswick Record on a Brunswick. 

Exclusive Methods the Reason 

Due to exclusive methods of Reproduction 
and of Interpretation, Brunswick achieves 
perfect rendition .of the so-called “difficult” 
tones _ the piano, the harp, the human 
voice; attaining even soprano High “C” 


without “metallic” intrusion, “chatter” or 
vibration. Methods which apply to no other 
phonograph or records. 

The Brunswick Method of Reproduction is 
exclusively Brunswick. (Note illustrations 
at left.) The Brunswick Method of Inter¬ 
pretation, in producing records, has not 
. been successfuly imitated. 

Hence, buying any phonograph, without at 
least hearing The Brunswick, is a mistake. 
And to be without Brunswick Records is to 
miss much of what is best in music. 

Ask your nearest Brunswick dealer for a 
demonstration. The Brunswick plays all 
records—and Brunswick Records can be 
played on any phonograph. Hear, compare 
—then judge for yourself. 



Hear TheSe Brunswick 

Super-Feature Records 


—price 34.00. Or singly if desired. 

{Any phonograph can play Brunswick 



TWO MORE GREAT ARTISTS 
NOW RECORD 

EXCLUSIVELY FOR BRUNSWICK 


FLORENCE EASTON 

Soprano 

Metropolitan Opera Company 


Florence Easton 

Accomplishment is the standard by which the world 
gauges the merit of an artist. 

Florence Easton, in making her debut on Brunswick 
lecords, brings universally recognized laurels—success 
on the European concert stage and in the Metropolitan 
Opera Company. 

Beauty and purity of voice, technical accomplishment 
and noteworthy versatility have won for her a unique 
place on both the operatic and concert stage. Musical 
critics recognize the rarity of her dramatic intelligence 
and vocal style. 

For her Brunswick premier, she has chosen Bach- 
Gounod’s “Avc Maria” with Max Rosen on the violin. 
This new presentation emphasizes the brilliance and 
charm which have characterized past triumphs. 


GIUSEPPE DANISE 

Premier Baritone 
Metropolitan Opera Company 


Long before the Metropolitan Opera Compay suc¬ 
ceeded in engaging Giuseppe Danise as premier bari¬ 
tone, he was known throughout Europe as a singer of 
rare, attainments. And his American debut only add¬ 
ed to his triumphs the enthusiasm of New York 
opera loveis and critics. 

The dramatic dignity which has always characterized 
his singing places it on a plane far above the reach of 
the average operatic or concert artist. 

To hear his first Brunswick record, “Di Provenza ii 
mar” from Verdi’s “La Traviata” is to be convinced 
that the sonorous, appealing and vibrant qualities 
which have brought him fame, are unerringly iepro- 
duced on Brunswick records. 


THE BRUNSWICK-BALKE-COLLENDER CO., Chicago 

Manufacturers—Established 184S 
















































































THE ETUDE 


Page 590 SEPTEMBER 1921 


Simpler and more Progressive 
Study of Piano and violin 



For the Piano 

1EACHERS everywhere have accepted 
| “Martins Elementary Rudiments for 

I the Piano” as the new standard book of 

II instruction for beginners. It’s so simple 
it makes the study hour for children not only easier 



but happier. 


^Martin’s First ‘Book 


Printed in large type and big notes,, so little eyes can see 
and read without strain. It covers the ground; work of 
piano-playing to the second grade and contains interesting 
studies and recreation pieces in all necessary keys, giving 
necessary explanations and instructive suggestions with 
every number. The book is practical, simple and very clear, 
and is undoubtedly the best book for beginners ever published. 

SMartin’s Second Book 

to be used following first book of “Elementary Rudiments 
for the Piano.” 

Progressive Studies, Recreation Pieces and Piano Duets in 
the most necessary major and minor keys take the pupil, 
step by step, to the third grade in a manner that is always 
interesting, attractive and thoroughly comprehensive. The 
Studies and Recreation Pieces are melodious, and the neces¬ 
sary explanations and instructive suggestions are clearly 
understood. It will be of great interest to Teachers and 
Pupils, alike, so don’t fail to look it over. 

Price 75c each book 




% ! 


For the Violin 

ERE is the latest development in 
Violin Teaching- “Jahn’s Elementary 
Rudiments for the Violin.” Simple. 
Illustrated. Resultful. 

John’s First Book 

This book is written entirely in the first position, bringing 
the new student through all the necessary keys, giving the 
correct bowing, arid explaining with every new number the 
new features tb be mastered. 

There are studies and recreation numbers with each scale 
to enforce it tin the pupil’s mind in such an interesting 
manner that the first position is mastered in quicker time 
and with less difficulty than is possible through any other 
method or'instruction book. 

John’s Second Book 

to be used following first book of “Elementary Rudiments 
for the Violin.”- 

This book makes the pupil familiar with the different posi¬ 
tions in such, a;way, that every new position, given and 
illustrated in a very clear and attractive way, is mastered 
very easily and with little effort. The Scales, Studies and 
Recreatioh Pieces are so progressive, instructive and enter¬ 
taining, that, the student will be anxious to familiarize him¬ 
self with every new feature. Every ambitious Teacher and 
Pupil ought to try these books, written by one of New 
York’s most successful Violin Teachers. 

Price 75c each book 


< YoUR Dealer will show you “Martin’s Rudiments for the Piano” 

and “John's Rudiments for the Violin” > 

Send for complete Catalogue—no charge 

CENTURY MUSIC PUBLISHING CO. 

222 WEST 40th STREET NEW YORK CITY 



Please mention THE ETUDE when addressing our advertisers. 


THE etude 


\ 


SEPTEMBER 1921 


Page 591 


OFF TO THE COUNTRY 

MARCH 




Copyright 1917 by Theo. Presser Co. 


British Copyright secured 









































































































































































































































































THEETUDE 


Pagr, 592 SEPTEMBER 1921 T7A T qTT FOSTASY 

VALoJi ■CA.'O „ lth comparative .... .id fluency. Grade 4. 

A liv«ly“rut»l«ir Walt.” lyin* .0 well under the hand, that .t may be taken a 

Brillante 


ISABELLE G. KNOUSS 



# From here go to the beginning and play to Fine, then play Trio. 
Copyright 1921 by Theo. Presser Co. 


British Copyright secured 






































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Page 594 SEPTEMBER 1921 


THE ETUDE 


IMPROMPTU 


FRANZ SCHUBERT, Op. 142, No.2 


One of the imperishable gems of melody. To be played in simple,unaffected style and with extreme accura y 




the ETUDE 


SEPTEMBER 1921 


Page 595 




































































































































































































































































































































































































































SEPTEMBEH 1V21 


THE ETUDE 


THE TRUANTS 

A jolly little Humoresque introducing a familiar nurser y rhyme. Play with m arked rhythm. Grade 2 a 


A.GARLAND 



Copyright 1921 by Theo.PresserCo. CHEERFUL THOUGHTS 

In semi-classic style; suitable also for organ. Grade 2^ _ HERBERT RALPH WARD ,Op.38,No .l 

Allegretto M.M.#=126 5 



Copyright 1918 by Theo Presser Co. 


British Copyright secured 




CHANSON INDOUE 

A SONG OF INDIA N. RIMSKY- KORSAKOW 

from the Legend" SADKO” Transcription by GAYLORD YOST* 

One of the most popular of modern Russian numbers, originally for voice, but much played upon the violin. 

A nH a.ti ti no 



*Mr. Yost's name must appear on the program when this number is played in public. 
Copyright 1921 by Theo.Presser Co. 




















































































































































































































































































































































































































the 



SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 60S 


tiie etude 

A Talk to Boys Who Don’t Want Music 


We knew a whole man once. He was 
a hard-riding cowboy, a sure shot, a brave 
soldier, was unafraid of African lions or 
political enemies, a lover of a good fight, 
and a good fighter. And'he loved music. . 
H« loved it almost as much as we do. 
Maybe more. He loved it so dearly that 
whenever he heard certain strains of 
nSelody the tears came to his eyes, and he 
wasn't ashamed of them a bit. Sometimes 
When we’ve heard'something, that makes us 
"choke up” and brings tears to our eyes, 
W e catch ourselves looking around to see 
if anybody’s looking. Then we think about 
Theodore Roosevelt—a real man, a whole 
man—and feel ashamed of ourselves for 
feeling ashamed of our emotion. 

Don’t Knock it Out 

Did you ever see a piece of .furniture 
before it was varnished? Just as substan¬ 
tial as it ever will be. Yet you wouldn’t 
want it in the house. That’s because it 
isn’t the finished product. There’s some¬ 
thing lacking. . . . You’ve been hearing 
lets of things about your bodies—how to 
keep strong and well. You’ve read a lot 
drat makes you crazy to do something 
worth while in life. You are learning how 
to use your language so other folks will 
“get you”—will get you exactly; maybe 
you’re learning other languages, too. You 
may already know what you’re going to 
be, and be at work developing yourself for 
it. Well, there’s still another side to your¬ 
self, and you’d better think a bit about it 
if you don’t want to be like an unvarnished 
piece of furniture that nobody wants 
around. It’s the side that made Roosevelt 
tvhole enough to cry when he heard cer¬ 
tain music. It was something inside of 
him that was especially fine. It’s in you— 
in everybody. It’ll stay there unless you 
let somebody knock it out of you some 
day by some smart-aleck remark. Maybe 
you'll knock it out of yourself by saying 
sometime, ip a smart-aleck way, “Music 
can't interest me.” Maybe you’ll cruelly 
knock it out of some other boy—some boy 
you see walking along with a violin under 
his arm, or a saxophone or a clarinet—by 
saying something to him that hurts. But 


In the great Bethlehem Steel Works 
they stop all the machinery at a certain 
hour every day. And'then what happens? 
The thousands of men and women who 
work there listen to music. It’s very costly 
to stop all the machinery in a big factory 
and do a thing like that. But Charles M. 
Schwab, who arranged it, says the gain of 
it offsets the loss. Melodies get the work¬ 
ers’ minds off their work—dusts out their 
brains — and they go back refreshed men¬ 
tally and physically. They work better, 
they produce more, they are happier. 
Those workers may not know it, but their 
employer, whose wages clothe and feed 
their bodies, has also fed their souls— 
nourished the gentle, spiritual side of the 
individual. 

Schwab’s Reasons 

We suppose you're wondering, “Does 
Schwab take his own medicine?” He does: 
Every week without fail he takes off 
several hours to listen to music. He’s a 
practical man, so he must have his reasons. 
Here they are: “I don’t want to become 
a dried-up business man. I want to keep 
alive the fountains of sentiment. If senti¬ 
ment should ever go out of my life I 
would feel that I had ceased to exist as a 
human being, that I had become' a ma¬ 
chine. Music helps me to keep human.” 

Brains Work Better 

And here’s something else. It proves 
what we said about music dusting out your 
brains. Some of the greatest men in the 
world have said that music has inspired 
them to think clearly — to think out new 
and brilliant ideas. We haven’t any doubt 
about it. Some of the most brilliant ideas 
we ever had came to us while we were 
listening to our wife play on the piano a 
Bach fugue, or a Chopin nocturne, or 
picture ful harmonies of MacDowell or 
Debussy. And they came—those brilliant 
ideas—after we had worked hard all day 
at the office and gone heme utterly fagged 
and sure that we couldn’t think another 
thought till to-morrow.—From The Ameri¬ 
can Boy. 


The Music Student and the Public Library 

By G. F. Schwartz 


Music students, as a rule, are seldom 
encouraged or assisted in doing systematic 
reading and reference work relating to 
their study. If there be any desire or op¬ 
portunity for collateral reading, it is 
furthermore too often likely to be spas¬ 
modic and aimless. A student’s lessons are 
presumably arranged according to some 
logical plan; but many of the supplemen¬ 
tary things which a music student ought to 
know are seldom given the attention which 
they deserve. 

Very few Public Libraries are any 
longer to be found which do not contain at 
least a few books—texts, encyclopedias 
and periodicals—relating to msuic. To 
make the most of this opportunity the 
student should follow some definite plan. 

First, it would be well to make as com¬ 
plete an acquaintance as possible with the 
musical material which the local, or near¬ 
est accessible Public Library has to affer. 

Second, lay out a plan according to per¬ 
sonal tastes or needs. If practicable, set 
aside certain hours of the week for the 
work. Among the particular topics which 
suggest themselves, one might decide to 


concentrate upon Musical Theory, History 
including current events, or a supplemen¬ 
tary knowledge of one’s instrument. 
Under the first heading, for instance, the 
student might undertake (more exten¬ 
sively than is practicable in the studio) the 
study of Terminology, Harmony and 
Musical Form. The task will become sur¬ 
prisingly attractive and instructive as one 
advances. 

Third, acquire the habit of keeping 
memoranda. For this purpose filing cards 
are very satisfactory. Definitions, data, 
ideas, themes (musical excerpts) may thus 
be preserved, and filed after they have been 
properly headed and classified. 

If the student is reasonably persistent 
and methodical, the ability to select de¬ 
sirable material will soon be acquired. 
The information thus gained may be con¬ 
stantly, supplemented and modified as the 
student’s horizon broadens. As a result of 
the personal character of the selection and 
arrangement of material, the collected 
mamoranda will eventually acquire a value 
which will generously compensate for the 
time and effort expended. 


Every New ETUDE Subscriber in Your Community Raises Musical 
Interest One Step Higher. 



1VERS & POND 
PIANOS 



g 


SMALL GRAND de LUXE 

All the broad experience of Ivers fcf 
Pond Grand Piano building is embodied in 
this delightful model. The incomparable tone 
quality, remarkable volume, and unexcelled 
durability which have determined over 500 
leading American Educational Institutions to 
choose the Ivers fcf Pond, show to maximum 
advantage in the Princess Grand. The de¬ 
mand for high-class Grands is insistent their 
construction slow and painstaking. We there¬ 
fore urge prospective buyers to order now. 

When you take up the matter of a new piano, you 
Will want a grand. Why not start now by letting us 
mail you a catalogue showing the Princess and all our 
grands, uprights and players ? Write for a paper 
pattern, showing the exact floor space the Princess 
requires. 

Wherever in the United States we have no dealer, 
we ship direct from the factory. Liberal allowance 
for old pianos in exchange. Attractive easy payment 
plans. 

s Write us today i 

Ivers & Pond Piano Co. 

141 Boylston St. Boston, Mass. 



Please mention SUE ETUDE when addressing 























































































































































































































































































































THE 


etude 


Page 601y 

SEPTEMBER 1921 






f 


i 

h - - * * * 

' 


- -— 

- !j 



Department for Voice and Vocal Teachers 

Edited by the Well-Known Voice Teacher 

H. W. GREENE 

“Thank You for Your Most Sweet V oic e s . —SH A K E S P E A R E 



Observation on the Vocal Field 


Some not unthoughtful pessimist asso¬ 
ciated the Vocal Profession with the 
“Cemetery of Shattered Hopes,” and not 
without reason. 

There are so many motives back of 
efforts to learn to sing that it seems almost 
impossible to classify them. But back of 
all is the half developed hope that- the 
diamond mine may be discovered. 

It is hardly necessary to waste sympathy 
on but a few; and they are the ones who 
had the gifts and the will to become great 
but were thwarted by incorrect teaching. 

It is true that a ship must be steered to 
reach port, and as true that vocal students 
must be guided to win success. But an 
added element of uncertainty is the 
student’s own attitude to the question. -So 
few first estimate the art of Singing as a 
thing apart from themselves. The jroung 
College Grad who has the backing of sound 
paternal advice investigates the Engineering 
Profession, for example, as a thing apart. 
Is it attractive? Is it healthful? Is it 
lucrative? Will it lead to eminence; and, 
last, of all comes the question from the 
introspective viewpoint—“Do I possess the 
right qualifications for its pursuit?” Not so 
with the Vocal Student. He or his family 
or friends or Sunday School Teacher heard 
him sing a hymn tune or a college song or 
a ballad and said to him “My, what a beau¬ 
tiful voice,” and after a few repetitions of 
that kind is it reasonable to suppose {hat 
he is any longer in his right mind? 

It is difficult to follow the line of reas¬ 
oning that actuates the young persons who 
become infatuated with the vocal ideas. 
They as a rule violate all the traditions 
of business, and follow instincts which lead 
them in various directions at once. It will 
be a joyful day in the singing world when 
there are as many excellent singing artists 
as there are excellent voices that could be 
singers if rightly guided; and developed 

Never Cease to Study 

Teachers of singing never cease to be 
students. If their pupils studied their vocal 
problems with the same interest and con¬ 
centration that the Singing Teacher studies 
his pupils, there could be no question of 
their progress. 

The reason that the teacher’s problem 
requires so much study is because,, unlike 
any other profession, the voice teacher 
cannot work with a formula. A formula 
cannot even be imagined that will make a 
groove to which, all voices could be 
adjusted. 

It is impossible to expect a pgpil to 
become an artist without meeting, certain 
technical requirements.- It is the way the 
requirements are met that dominate their 
permanent value. There is a wide diverg¬ 
ence of opinion as to what really is essen¬ 
tial fundamentally. There are some who 
attach no great value to the various group 
forms and embellishments. 

The closest attention should be given 
them until they are a part of one. Two 


fortunate results of this work are, readi¬ 
ness to present them fluently when occasion 
arises and the smoothness and beauty of 
tone resulting from much use of the light 
tone employed in their practice. 

Another point on which teachers differ 
greatly is in the use of Vocalises. We 
believe the right use of Vocalises to be (fie 
most refining influence in developing musi¬ 
cal taste and character. To plunge unre¬ 
servedly-from written exercises and scales 
iiito repertoire is to deprive the student of 
one of the most important factors in the 
development of his art. The vocal student 
should have an intimate acquaintance with 
juch composers as Batiste, Lemoine, Lut- 
gen, Concone, Nava, Rossini, Louis Schu¬ 
bert, MarchqSi, Ponafka, Rubini, Bordogni; 
all writers of Vocalises. 

The writer cannot reiterate too em¬ 
phatically the importance of a gradual 
growth of the vocal instrument, as against 
the forcing process. 

Let those, who estimate the qualities 
known as endurance, permanence and 
resistance, examine the vocalise repertoir’e, 
and they will find hidden there much that 
is conducive to vocal health and pros¬ 
perity. 

Jennie Lind’s Renown 

Readers of The Etude who reside in or 
near any of the large cities of the country 
have the opportunity of hearing modern 
sopranos who are reputed to be great. 
Unfortunately greatness is a term which so 
far as singers are concerned, carries with 
it no definite message. An artist whose 
name has become familiar is often called 
great, irrespective of the processes by 
which the familiarity grew. 

Present day advertising has been reduced 
to a system (one might almost say a 
science) the machinery of which can temp¬ 
orarily create a halo which will fit the head 
of almost any grade of artist. Whether 
the halo shall brighten or fade when the 
publicity .machine ceases working, affords 
a cue as to the greatness under consider¬ 
ation Is it the veneer of the advertiser or 
the announcement of genuine art? 

A teacher, a manager and the singer her¬ 
self may seem entirely justified in feeling 
that she has a message so strikingly direct, 
so beautiful, so artistic that the public will 
greet her with acclaim. But the public sup¬ 
plies the prucial test. We cannot deceive 
the “dear public.” Nor wiil the public 
allow us tb deceive ourselves for any length 
of time. . The public is the court of last 
resort. 

It is a difficult matter to convince some 
singers that they are not artists. It may 
be equally difficult to convince some artists 
that they are not singers. The terms are 
not necessarily inter-changeable. 

While the manager can by artful adver¬ 
tising temporarily surround the singer with 
an envelope of greatness, and even the 
public places the seal of approval upon the 
work, there is yet another factor that enters 
into the problem of greatness, which might 
be called the time test. If an artist’s repute 


for greatness, survives the time test, 
she is truly great. That means a page 
6f history. Contemporary greatness is 
a matter of comparison. This element of 
greatness, whether it be in music, engineer¬ 
ing or finance, furnishes innumerable 
examples of relative or comparative super¬ 
iority of one person over many others. This 
may be accounted for in many ways; but 
in the field of vocal music one quality can¬ 
not be disregarded, and that quality is 
personality. Some call it magnetism, others 
call it character. It may be a combination 
of the three. But taken either as a whole 
or in' part, there is no real singing great¬ 
ness without them. 

This is a somewhat lengthy preamble 
to a subject that is ever new and interest¬ 
ing to all young American students and 
singers. Why is it that the name of Jenny 
Lind is constantly brought forward and 
held up as an ideal? Why is the pedestal 
upon which she stands higher than that of 
any other singer of which we hear ? 

In answer we will say she has been 
measured by the time test and her reputa¬ 
tion seems to increase in brilliancy rather 
than fade, by being subjected to that test. 
It is as true in art as in any other of life's 
activities that nobility of soul and beauty 
of character have as much to do with the 
permanency of one’s- reputation as the 
excellence of the art itself. 

It is said that Hans Christian Anderson 
through Jenny Lind first became sensible 
to the holiness of art. Mendelssohn said she 
was a member of the “Church Invisible.” 

She experienced early the trials of the 
struggling artist. At fourteen her voice 
seemed to leave her, and Manuel Garcia, 
her Parisian teacher, was very dubious 
about her possibilities. Courage and indus¬ 
try were the deciding factors upon which 
her future greatness was made possible. 

Her greatest contemporary artist, Giulia 
Grisi, who had held her in jealous hatred 
and contempt, heard her in concert and 
was melted to tears by the appealing charm 
of her singing. We are indebted to the 
Scandinavian Review for many interesting 
facts concerning her first appearance in 
America, which formed one of the most 
brilliant chapters in the history of Amer¬ 
ican enthusiasm. 

It is said that the longer she sang in 
America the greater became her reputa¬ 
tion and that the newspapers were at a loss 
for words to express their increasing 
admiration for her art. 

She was equally admired for her benevo¬ 
lence generosity and charm of disposition. 

Following are some of the press com- 
ments upon her singing :-“Her vocaliza¬ 
tion is beyond criticism,” “The echo sh P 
produces in a Swedish Song is equaled only 

Sriiw^d^^ 1 * the 

derful and so beautiful that thTVho W 

it lose all sense except of pleasure” 

it is extremely doubtful if there are 
any living today who had the pleasure of 

& te, Lind , ,ta8 ta “* wm 

States. But it is refreshing to read the 


enthusiastic opinion of 
period. 

The following quotati 
dimvian Review (it 1> 
gives in a few words a 
record of her achieve 
serve as an inspiratioi 
student of singing. 

“Jenny Lind’s sojouri 
fruitful in many ways, 
a chain of charities iii 
which orphans and sick 
and healed. The rapt 
created a criterion by 
of every other artist 1 
from that day to this, 
her pure and noble 
remained to music a 
which the scandal and 


the writers of the 


being who heard her, h 
to the hour of death as 
sublime revelation of 
ecstasy of music itself 
America owes Jenny I 
greater debt that has 
nized. She brought tli 
ment of America to coi 
Her tour was the supr 
national history when ; 
dent, enthusiastic, imp 
knew its own capacity 
forever. From that h> 
or denied the world's ; 
have made pilgrimages 
its own consciousness < 
and temperament.” 


The Try Out 

If a singing master -diould attempt to 
outline conditions that could be called ideal 
in his own profession, the purpose being to 
guide young teachers in their work, lie 
would be at a loss where to begin. Since, 
however, one could not accept a voice with¬ 
out trying it, let us first take up the lilies' 
tion of diagnosing the case of an applies 
for instruction. 

Diagnosing the voice is a simple a c 
indeed, if the judgment bearing on a career 
could be formed from purely surface 
exhibits. The first act of a voice would 


n ' rom the Scan- 
'ing a quotation) 
fair and beautiful 
nents. It should 
to every young 

in America was 
I ler progress left 
"iigh the land by 
are still nurtured 
ire of her music 
which the success 
■i- been measured 
The tradition qf 
womanhood Has 
bulwark against 
corruption of the 
•rid has broken in 
of every huirian 
r singing has rung 
be one perfect and 
the beauty and 
This is much. But 
ind oije other and 
never been recog- 
mujical tempera- 
iousness of itself, 
me moment in our 
\merica, ar- 
--ihle, heard aqd 
or musical feeling 
ur it has received 
: utest artists who 
hither, supreme in 
f its artistic needs 


be hearing single sustained tones 


a differ- 


it parts of the voice, using different v< 


of 


give the teacher opportunity to judge 
the quality of the voice, what the tendency 
of tone emission is and some idea as 
attack and truth of the ear as to pitch- 
second act in the process might be tp - 
an ascending and descending scale of 
five to nine tones at different rates of sp ■ 

This with judicious transpositions, a 

the teacher all he needs to know veaea 
ately about the elasticity of the voice 
the possibility of compass. „ try 

The third and last feature of the 
out” would be to hear the applicant 
a few measures of a song (if he kr¬ 
one) or a ballad or hymn that he ^j s 
from his church or school days, 
gives opportunity to judge of the 


n is , 

tendencies 


the etude 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 605 


in regard to breathing, phrasing and 

fh Here we have an all sufficient voice test 
that any young teacher can master by giving 
thought to the sequence, and what he wishes 
to learn of the applicant through the use of 
it This formula is used with but few and 
unimportant changes by all teachers. 

It is what follows that concerns us. The 
words spoken to the applicants or their 
parents after this simple test has been made. 
We now know what the voice is in the mat¬ 
ter of quality—what its needs are as to 
method and attack, agility and compass, 
phrasing, breathing and rhythm. Shall we 
tell the would-be student that she has a 
voice, or no hopes of a voice, or that she 
can surely become an artist of rank? If 
ffie teacher wishes to maintain her dignity 
and standing in the profession he will do 
neither. He will say—“Conditions seem to 
favor the wisdom of making the experi¬ 
ment. Your voice is not as good as many 
who have had high hopes of a career and 
failed, and is better than many who receive 
no .encouragement at the start, but realize 
the fullest -success.” i b. 

The teacher who has had experience is 
Slow in giving positive or definite encour¬ 
agement. The reason is that so many fac¬ 
tors are to be taken into account, quite 
independent of the ones just mentioned. 
They could not be- determined by the above 
simple tests. When brought to the sur¬ 
face by the actual experience of study, 
errors leading to a great injustice may be 
discovered. 

It is difficult in writing of the above to 
exercise a spirit of patience with some mod¬ 
ern teachers. The kindest thing that can be 
said of them being that they are extremely 
optimistic in regard to their ability to place 
voices in the front rank in the Operatic 
Profession. An advertisement came to our 
notice, the other day, of a teacher who 
calmly guarantees that those who study 
with him shall accomplish in six months 


what they would be able to accomplish 
with other teachers in six years, because he 
has discovered secrets that the average 
unsophisticated singing master has over¬ 
looked, in the matter of training voices. 
That such claims result in bringing busi¬ 
ness cannot be denied. An apt'comparison 
as to the value of singing developed along 
these lines can be found in the cabinet¬ 
maker’s shop. The chair that is labeled for 
sale at six dollars stands next to one that 
is marked at sixteen dollars. They seem 
much alike; but a careful examination 
shows them to be entirely different in every 
particular. The supreme test of this value 
being endurance. It is inconceivable that 
an athlete who goes into the races without 
first becoming hard through much careful 
training, should stand up under the stress 
of contest, as w.ell as the man who had 
been carefully coached. 

The musical profession will await the 
results of these six months of training 
with great interest. “Art is long, and time 
is fleeting,” we are told. If we read the 
litfes of the great painters and sculptors of 
the. past, we are impressed with the fact 
that their progress was often very slow. 
Leonardo da Vinci worked for years mak¬ 
ing sketches of every imaginable object— 
trying to develop his technique. Instru¬ 
mentalists work for years before they con¬ 
sider that they have any proficiency what¬ 
ever. We must estimate proportionately 
the demands of a singing artist, considering 
the work needed in a purely musicianly 
way, familiarity -with an instrument, abil¬ 
ity to read, at sight, as well as the knowl¬ 
edge of the lyric diction of at least two 
or three languages, not to mention a care¬ 
ful cultivation of histrionic ability. He 
must be able to make his audience feel what 
he is trying to express. We must do one 
of two things—either admit that singing is 
not an art alongside of painting, writing, 
sculpture, or disregard the assertion that 
a singer can be made in six months. 


Three Vocal Enemies 


By Arthur de Guichard 


Female voices should reduce their' so- 
called “chest register” to the strictest mini¬ 
mum. Their organs are not constructed for 
this register. They would do well, there¬ 
fore, to observe this very concise formula: 
Contralto the least possible; Mezzo-soprano 
very little; Soprano not at all. Most writ¬ 
ers and teachers of singing are agreed in 
recognizing the fact that the number of 
voices broken by the abusS of the so-called 
chest register is very considerable. Mel- 
chissedec, formerly chief baritone at the 
Grand Opera, Paris (France) for a great 
number of years, and afterwards professor 
of singing at the Paris Conservatory, whose 
professional singing career embraced a 
period of fifty-one years (1862-1913) and 
who, at the age of seventy-two could sing 
and did sing two or three hours daily, is 
most biting in his satirical condemnation of 
the “chest voice” and of the “head voice. 
After recounting the meteor-like careers of 
artists, such as Nourrit (who had a “chest” 
high D), Mile. Falcon, and others whose 
beautiful voices had but short lives, Mel- 
,chissedec relates an amusing detail^ in the 
life of Grassini. This'singer had a “power¬ 
ful and extensive contralto with a power 
of light and finished execution rarely found 
with that kind of voice.” At the age of 
seventy-six she took part in a soiree given 

Musical 

Jenny Lind had at least her share of 
those extravagant compliments that cotrie 
to gifted people. After hearing her sing, 
.Lablache generously assured her that 
“Every note was a pearl.” 

At a rehearsal soon after this incident, 
the young singer asked of the great basso 
that she might have his hat. Retir.ng to 


to a- fellow-professional at the Conserva¬ 
tory. Asked to sing, she interpreted a very 
fine Italian aria, : in which were many notes 
well above the treble cleff. A snob—they 
already existed at that epoch, but they were 
termed otherwise—approached and, w th the 
idea that he was paying her a compliment, 
said to her: “Ah, Madame, how admirably 
you sing; all the more so because you do 
not use your chest voice!” Grassin', who 
had never been able to get rid of her 
Neapolitan, pronounciation, replied: "La 
voce di poitrinc! qu’cquc cc cd?” (Chest 
voice, what's that? “Why, this!” and the 
snob shouted out a strong,chest note. “Ah! 
malhcurcux," said she, “ni faitc pas cd. 
t oils aites voits abiwe Id voce!” (Ah! 
unhappy man; don’t do that; you will ruin 
your voice!) Without knowing it she had 
never sung with a “chest voice!” 

Thus the singer may see that the voice 
has three mortal enemies: Catarrh, Chest 
Notes and Constriction; and the greatest of 
these three is Constriction (tight throa'). 
Chest notes assuredly lead to Constriction, 
which, if taken in time, may be cured by 
complete rest and re-posing the voice; but 
the cure is not certain. 

The catarrh remedy is here; all that 
remains to be done, is to apply it persever- 
ingly and faithfully. 

Gushers 

the back of the stage, she sang a light 
air into the broad-brimmed hat. Then 
approaching Lablache she ordered that he 
fall on bended knee while she had a 
valuable token to bestow. Then return¬ 
ing the hat .she said slyly: “I will 
now make you extremely rich by return¬ 
ing your hat full of your own brand of 



There is constant danger 

in an oily skin 

I F your skin has the habit of continually getting 
oily and shiny—you caftnot begin too soon to 
correct this condition. 

. A certain amount of oil in your skin is necessary 
to keep it smooth, velvety, supple. But too much oil 
not only spoils the attractiveness of any girl’s com¬ 
plexion—it actually tends to promote an unhealthy 
condition of the skin itself. 

A skin that is too oily is constantly liable to infec¬ 
tion from dust and dirt, and thus encourages the 
formation of blackheads, and other skin troubles 
that come from outside infection. 

You can correct an oily skin by using each night 
the following simple treatment: 
tt tITH warm water work up a heavy lather of 
W Woodbury’s Facial Soap in your hands. 

Apply to your face and rub it into the pores 
thoroughly—always with an upward and outward 
motion. Rinse with warm abater, then with cold. 

If possible, rub your face for thirty seconds with a 
piece of ice. 

'Special treatments for each type of skin 
are given in the famous booklet of treat¬ 
ments that is wrapped around every cake 
pf Woodbury ? s Facial Soap. 

Get a cake of Woodbury’s today, at any 
drug store or toilet goods counter, and begin 
tonight the treatment your skin needs. 

A 25-cent cake of Woodbury s lasts for 
a month or six weeks. 


“ Your treatment for one week ” 

S END 25 cents for a dainty miniature set of 
the Woodbury skin preparations containing 
the treatment booklet, “A Skin You Love to 
Touch;” a trial .size cake 
cf Woodbury’s Facial 

Soap; and samples of the W),i 

new Woodbury Facial ^'To-fn,, 

Cream, Woodbury’s Cold Jli&sLi: 1 ^ 

Cream and Facial Pow- ! 
der. Address The An- If 
drew Jergens Co., 5609 jf* 

Spring Grove Ave., Citi- B 4?* 

cinnati, Ohio. If you live 
in Canada, address The 
Andrew Jergens Co., 

Limited, 5609 Sherbrooke 


St., Perth, Ontario. 



Copyright, 1 Ml, by The Andrew Jergens CX . 


Flsaso mention THE ETUDE when addressing our advertise.s. 










































Page G06 SEPTEMBER 1921 



Schomacker 
Style F Grand 

The quality of its tone 
enraptures the heart 
as its beauty of con¬ 
struction delights the 


Schomacker Piano 
Company 

PHILADELPHIA, PA. 


D. A. CLIPPINGER 

SSS'KaHE Ll ““:: ! !i 


W.P. SHILLING 


Tenor book, part I, free. 





Verdi’s “Aida” 

asked" t a o Ve de S t e erminf"which of"'verdi’s i/lWw’hen Egypt was alive with the 
famous works was his greatest, might pos- completion of the Suez Canal. There, 
sibly decide between Othello 'and Falstaff ; behind^ skilfully contrived gril^the^Sul- 

combiiied H V e nli’s Aida] s unquestionably oper^ ° Through political troubles in 
his masterpiece. It was in this work France, brought about by the War, the 

manner tL^LenceVthe German grinfi 1871 VecS^thT Verdi conducted 
Wanner, without copying him. It is an it in Milan, at La Scala, in 1872. It was 
infinitely bigger Verdi than that of Trova- given at the Academy of Music in New 
tore and Rigoletto, but a Verdi with all York, in 1873. Annie Louise Carey, Cam- 
the sensuous charm of spontaneous mel- panini and Maurel were in the cast. The 


Verdi had had ample oppbrtunity to study with Caruso i 
the success of his Teutonic rival and, Aida, greatly i. 


It is not known whether the story is of 
of Bey, Oriental origin, but it is believed that 


had bestowed upon him the title of Bey, 
and known as Mariette Bey, was one of 
the .foremost antiquarians and Egyptolo- Oriental character which the master 
gists of his day. He had discovered the adapted to his uses. That he understood 

him P was given the commisrioi'of writing IpProxi^tdy- 
a spectacular pageant for the new Italian C-D-E flat 
Theatre in Cairo, built by the Khedive 


e the great Verdi write a work espe- . The opera has been sen: 

___of MSS. great master! "vlrd" a^ked^LMO pounds s^ch “nuXrTas 1 ^" 4 ^ 

A SPECIALTY sterling for the work. The Khedive paid Celeste Aida Ritorn 

A. W. BORST, Presser Bldg., Phila., Pa. 100,000 francs for the rights of c 




ier Bldg., rhlla., Vt>. 100,000 francs for the rights of original mia , O Terra Addio are known in a 
rtanororu,** Pure*Music production. Mariette wrote the plot, million homes through the ever oooular 
— Camille du Locle made it into a French talking machine records. P i 




THE ETUDE 



❖ SUMMY’S CORNER * 


«SWRJ“JBK. 

Little pieces with words that tell a 

rifts' 

For the intermediate grades and for 

vSle'conufbution^ ^ “* ‘ 


CLAYTON F. SUMMY CO. 



L 


the etude 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 607 


































































































































THE ETUDE 


Page 60S SEPTEMBER 1921 


____ ■ - ^ » * ) t! 

— -- 

' ——— ; - . - 


Department for Organists 

Edited by Well-Known Specialists 

‘Let the Base of Heaven's Deep Organ Blo«."-U . l t o n 


and springy that Dr. Camidge, though a 
powerful man, was quite unable to control 
it. In a letter to Mr. Barker, Dr. Camidge 
expressed himself as follows: “With all 
the energy I can rally about me I am some¬ 
times inclined to make a full stop from 
actual fatigue. . Such a difficult touch as 
Chafes Spackman mrKer was Dorn ar ^ q{ York Cathedral organ is doubtless 

Bath, October 10, 1806. When only five tQ ~ paralize the effor ts of most 

years of age he had the misfortune to lose „ 

his father who was an artist the younger ® commenced to make 

of three brothers, all of whom followed wit1l fl view t0 devising some 


The Inventor of the Pneu¬ 
matic Action 

By T. W. Hinton 

Charles Spackman Barker was born : 


Making Sunday School Sing¬ 
ing Interesting 

By C. Harold Lowden 

a well known composer of 


How many schools are blessed with 
competent leaders ? Probably 
forty per cent. 


, experiments with a vie 

tne same profession. ' means by which org; 

It was the boys good fortune to be f(tf SQme dme trying - 

adopted by his godfather and moreover ud | ize d]e power G f compressed air in 
to receive an excellent education. From cylinders provided with pistons, but after 
a very early age he showed an inherited many attempts j n t his direction he came to 
gift for drawing and evinced great interest realize that the ' lateral friction of a piston . - 

in natural science and chemistry. Un- was a i most prohibitive unless wird of a rather than a leader, that new s g 
fortunately his godfather was unable to pressure greater than was ever dreamed of ’ J ' r ™“ *" ' v ' nm 

see anything in the pursuit of such attain- at tda t time were used—and, abandoning 
ments other than an unworthy trifling with the cylinders, he employed small bellows, 
higher advantages and in consequence or “motors” as we should now call them. 

Barker was removed from school rather This attempt was satisfactory, resulting nounce the same old dozen or so songs 
prematurely and apprenticed to an apothe- in the production of a primitive type of until the school gets so tired of them it 
cary and chemist at Bath. pneumatic lever. Barker then approached simply refuses to sing at all. 

It has been stated that Barker was for a Messrs. Hill, showing them how he had j believe at least one new song should 
time a medical student but, throughout a solved the difficulty which had marred j )e i earne d each session. Better still, if 
period of seven years during which I was their best organsYork . Minster and ten m j nutes C ould be spared some time 
acquainted with him, I cannot recall any Birmingham Town Hall. Dr. Pole ( Irca- duri thg session and could be designated 
4 ... .. , . .i • Hen m Munrnl Instruments, o. 77) deals .. „__■ , „ __..in 


What about the 
touch might be balance? They are getting along some¬ 
how, and probably learning as many new 
songs as their more fortunate neighbors. 

It is too often the fault of an incom¬ 
petent or thoughtless superintendent, 
:her than a leader, tha 
t learned. Time and again complaint 

_s been made that while fully one-third 

of the songs in a book have never been 
tried, a superintendent will continue to an- 


“In the first instance he (Barker) endeav- 


song period,” the scholars would 
know what to expect, and I am confident 
would respond with enthusiasm. 

I doubt if we can lay down 


statement. 

r; % 'r du “ 

his lips one Sunday in Pans, when we Englland. Experience m g s rules by which all schools may be governed 

were sheltering from the rain under a then totally wto “ in this matter, but I think all will agree 


1 agree 

that a good player is essential, and fortun- 

- - - . valii^ nf the ately there are few schools that cannot 

« 5 — —— 

happily obsolete); and their howls and P atent ,n 1839> and 
blood-curdling screams used 
a little. 


and upset him not 

When it came to his lot to learn the 
“butchering business”, as he facetiously 
termed it, he refused point blank and thus 
friction between himself and his master 
commenced which culminated in his leaving 
before he was “out-of his 
Two years afterwards v 
scribed as an organdJuill 


fortunately, the best player is not always 
used, but because of jealousy, politics in the 
other reason, 

French is kept out of service, while a less com- 

,_ .. afterwards the petent player is “murdering” everything 

unnerve pneumatic lever was applied with the attempted, 
greatest success to the organ at St. Denis. 


—From The Stoi-y of the Electric Organ. 

The Baby Organist 

Possibly one of the most astonishing 
instances i: 

Wfijjanf Crotch, pi 

..„ j. - ,a, c , .tuuwn, William Crotch, Mus. Doc. 

returned to his native city after sperffling This child was born at Norwich, England, 
in London most of the time which had ; n 177S H ; s f at h er was a carpenter who 
intervened. Some biographical notices state was mds ; ca i enough to have built an organ 
that during the period in question Barker for himse if The child commenced to 


Learning a New Song 

In teaching a new song, I first insist 
upon the undivided attention of the school 
while the accompanist carefully plays it 

H_ o through. If there are any particular in- 

instances in history of musical precocity structions concerning phrasing, emphasis, 
jk-- ^ that,, Of WtUiani Crotch, pr as he was or difficult time, I give them, hnd then 
. :8 [feter known, William Crotcn, 


had learned organ building at the shop of 
an eminent organ builder in London; but 
here two questions arise:' (1) Who was 
the eminent builder? and (2) Was 


play upon this instrument when 
baby, at the age of two. At the age of 
four he gave daily organ recitals in Lon- 
He had the gift of absolute pitch. 


possible to thoroughly learn organ building It should be rerne mbered that Mozart’ 


father did not begin to teach his child 


> years, especially for anyone 
previously skilled in joinery ? 

There is evidently a break in the con¬ 
tinuity of the records we possess which 
we can only note, pending the attaiiiment 
of information, bearing thereon. 

It was when an “organ-builder” at Bath 
that Barker heard of the difficulty which 

Dr. Camidge experienced in playing the "j n y 0U w m 

newly constructed brgan at York Minster, personal benefit there 
The touch of this instrument was so heavy able .’’— Ruskin. 


usually sing it straight through with the 
school. Sometimes I vary this by teaching 
a chorus first, particularly if I know an 
attractive chorus will “swing” a more 
difficult verse. Usually I sing the first 
verse twice, each time calling attention to 
anything that needs it, and sometimes it is 
well to sing a chorus three or four times, 
but I think it unwise to keep at one song 
until the school becomes tired. 

Time and again circumstances develop 


until he was four years old. In later ^at require instant attention, and „, >U j 

years he became one of the most distin- timcs Plans must be quickly changed to 

guished of England’s musicians and even- meet the occasion. A real leader is al- 
tually the principal of the Royal Academy Y ays r ® ady for any emergency and many 

of Music (1822). time f his success is dependent on his 

quick thinking and his ability to grasp 
an unusual situation and make the 
“In nmne vnu 7tiill snnn find out what best.of it. At all times there must be 

i being service- manifested a spirit of optimism, but it 

must be real and not assumed, for a 


bluffer is soon detected and might as 
well give up when he is discovered. 

It is my contention that it is entirely 
out of place in Sunday School to have 
a "bellowing bull,” or a 'jumping jack” 
to show off, or conduct a cheap vaude¬ 
ville performance. The music should 
be a wonderful means of worship, and 
the leader should simply direct that wor¬ 
ship by starting the song, calling atten¬ 
tion to some particularly striking though) 
of the words or beauty •<( the music, 
keeping every scholar interested, and at 
all times striving to drive h tne the mes¬ 
sage of the song, rather than to im¬ 
press upon .them his own accomplish¬ 
ments. Some leaders forget that they 
are (here to lead others in singing instead 
of showing off their own voices. A leader 
should not fail to catch die spirit of 
the song, the message of which he de¬ 
sires to impress upon tho-c he is lead¬ 
ing. The composer has given a message 
which he wishes conveyed. Many times an 
entirely different meaning is given. Study 
the song and give proper emphasis to the 
points as they impress you. Tempo is a 
study in itself. Some leaders seem unable 
tc judge the time in which a song should 
be sung by the nature and subject of 
the song. Many songs are perfect gems 
if kept up to the time, while their ef¬ 
fectiveness is entirely lost by dragging. 
Then there are songs which are wonder¬ 
fully impressive if sung slowly and com¬ 
pletely spoiled if taken quickly. 

Competent Leadership 

Some of my readers ma> contend that 
I have lost sight of the incompetent 
leader, and that my article is rather 
stressing the competent leader. I don’t 
believe there are many really incompe¬ 
tent leaders; that is, incompetent in the 
sense that they are not willing to learn. 
I believe the most untrained leader has 
within him the possibilities of com¬ 
petent leadership, and in this article I 
have tried to put before him sugges¬ 
tions that I believe will help him to 
measure up. He may not now be doing 
the things I have suggested, but the 
man with a fairly good voice, a genuine 
loVe of rtuisic and ,of children, a pleasing 
smile ahd common, ordinary ‘‘horse- 
sense” cah become a really good leader. 

Music is taught in most of the public 
schools, and this makes it much easier 
to teach new music in the Sunday-schools, 
and for this reason, if I were a superin¬ 
tendent of a school I would be more in¬ 
terested in getting a leader with rea 
religion and common sense than ou - 
standing musical ability. That does no 
mean that I do not stand for capa e 
musicians in Sunday-school work, for 
would pay good money any time for a 
spiritual, tactful musician with an a 
tractive personality; however, this eP®' 
bination is sometimes difficult to find, an 
if I couldn’t have the ideal, I woU d 
lay emphasis upon spirituality and goo 


fairly 


Given the right kind of gongs, a 
good accompanist, the opportunity 


the etude 




Stensaliaii 


Write 

i f° r 
I It! 


the coupon 
L ' or a postal for 
Philipsborn’s 
j jVFree 312-page 
xvf Style and 
Shopping 
fmJh Guide — 
pjfflr 7 the bargain 

‘ Jy sensationof the 
Jr season. Over 2Jf 
V million customers buy 
from Philipsborn’sStyle 
Book because it always 
offers Americas best 
styles at America's low¬ 
est prices. Here are two 
of the thousands of bar¬ 
gains in thisbigfreebook: 

All-Silk Georgette 
Dress $Z§8 


8X-14010XW9H\ -r.r 

aii snu raw vve 

Ik Pay 

Beaded If JAVli 

$ 5980 ^ 5 r Ail 

Prepaid | gnPllVPTy 

W Charges, 
Mens nursim/. 
All Wool $ 1 A 7 I 

SerseSuit p £!paid< 

«£» k c uc'.^ 0tt0m “ I 

•SS 19 - 44 1 

Price, prepaid . . . » . *14.75 

LowestPrices 

onkeadyto-Wearfor 
the Entire Family 

BSWSffSPS.'ES: 

Send Coupon 

for Big FREE Book 
PHILIPSBORN’S 

Dept. 121 Chicago, 111. 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 609 


(AUSTIN ORGAN 

] T HE world of art creation has never 
1 shown anything hper than a hne 


lich they are held by those who use 
em. A thousand of them playing 


ind cathedrals. 

AUSTIN ORGAN CO. 

165 Woodland St. Hartford, Conn. 


i 


D 


An inefficient 


regular intervals, and I believe the aver- ficed for any individual, 
age school will pretty nearly take care Sister "pianisT, 

of itself i 


Organ Students 

may obtain 

free scholarships 

at the 

Guilm&nt Organ School 

Write for Information 
Competition October 7th 

17 East Eleventh St., New York 


r D epartnrent, cT j cuT . 


A N ORGAN of three manuals now in use in 
the Presbyterian Church at Rome, N. Y. 
is offered for sale. It will be replaced by one 
of our large four manual organs, the gift of a 
wealthy member. For full particulars write 

THE EMMONS HOWARD ORGAN CO. 

WESTFIELD, MASS. 


I You can complete 

| this simplifiedjJHigh 

AMERICAN SCHOOL 


If 

Faust School of Tuning 

STANDARD OF AMERICA 
ALUMNI OF 2000 

Piano Tuning, Pipe and 

Rend Organ and Player 

Piano. Year Book Free 

' 27-29 Gainjboro Street 
BOSTON, MASS. 

Id FaUMUAH 

instruction Course for Advanced Pianists. Learn 67 styl^ 0 ^ 
Bass, 180 Syncopated Effects, Blue Harmony, Oriental, Online 
Movie and Cafe Jazz. Trick Ending, Clever Breaks, Space 
Fillers, Sax Slurs, Triple Bass, Wicked Harmony, Blue Obli¬ 
gato and 24/ other subjects, including E t ar ( ^jngf’Our FBEK 

WatennanPianoSohoo1,2ilSaperba Theater Bldg.,Los Angeles,Cal. 


, , .. , he be a superintendent, chorister, pianist, 

the learning of new music. &f teacher> shou i d be tactfully ap- 
Perhaps before closing it might be proac h e d, and with the kindest possible 
well to express my conviction that the explanation, should be replaced. From 
efficiency of a school should not be sacri- The Sunday School Times. 

The Pastor’s Viewpoint 

By Rev. Henry B. Hudson 

I respond to the article in the “Depart- Our churches are sufficiently tormented 
ment for Organists” in the February with new publications contmmng ten or a 
Etude with a few words in behalf of. the dozen fak hymns with 100 to o 
ministers who are often given “the jim miscalled Gospel Hymns, with tunes that 
jams” by the over zealous organists. If, would disrupt a Chinese rjursery and words 
as the writer suggested, ministers should that would disgrace a lunatic asylum. And 
be given a musical training (and it is when an organist turns loose a ! ™ sl 
desirable), then, also, organists surely diatribe that would discourage a gathering 
should be given a course of Bible study, of Kilkenny cats, the provocation o 
that they might better understand an organ- justify^ the minister in a ayl g 
ists place in a church service. Far from hands. 

being the “chief cook and bottle washer,” Another modern abomination to which 
the organist is not indespensable. organists might profitably devote some 

Indeed, there is grave reason to question remedial attention is the soloist who sings 
the wisdom of turning three-fourths of as ^ overcome with stage tig K 
the time devoted to a Christian church many otherwise fine voices are . r ^ ^ 
service over to a Christless orgAnist and a that trembling tone which is mistaken for 
Godless choir. “What concord has Christ an accomplishment by some near-musicians 
with' Belial; or what part hath he that Suppose an organ should develope a hxed 
believeth with an infidel?” tremolo habit how long before the organist 

A chrisS ctarch 1 not a concert hall, would yell for a tuner? Yet ^ 
nor were its methods designed to be congregat.on are ^ c t ed f 0 Slt ' n p,aC ? ld 
chiefly musical; as a reference to the contentment while that type of a singer (.) 
Divine institution and commission of the murders a hymn. - 

church will show. Then how little short While about it, I may as well hit him 
of impertinence are all assumptions of again” and call attention to the number 
authority by organists ahd choirs to control of organists who mistake noise for music, 
the order and conduct of any chtfrch The soft accompaniment that permits the 
service. clear sweet tones of the singer s voice to 

Since the pastor is everywhere held re- dominate is an unknown art to that large 
sponsible for the success or failure of a class of organists who regard a solo as a 
church under his ministry, why should an feeble accompaniment to the thunder of 
organist expect to select the hymns to' be the organ. The result is about as uplifting 
sung any more than the text and theme of an exercise as a pup chasing a railroad 
the sermon? Every successful minister train; his jaw can be seen to be working, 
chooses the hymns for his service with as but his voice is lost in the roar of the tram, 
great care as is given to the choice of a One closing thought regardmg the com- 
text for the sermon; for they are as im- parative value in CHURCH bEKVlCUb 
portant and useful. And rarely can the of the so-called classical music and the 
| music be the determining factor as is simpler tunes so widely used in Christian 
usually the case when left to an organist, worship. An experience of over forty 
How frequently has the writer, when years ; n t be ministry, many of them in the 
invited to supply for a Sunday some ,y ef city 0 £ tb ; s coun t ry> and extending 

neighboring church, been handed a selection fyom ^ Atlantic to the Padfic> has left 

of hymns by the organist with the coo unansw£redj from the organ j st c s vie w- 

ZSFA 5 r« St 52 52 *** «• 

unknown to the congregation while the attend day after day two. service^-at ten 
words would be a fitting accompaniment and two o’clock—sometimes held in a 
to an address on “Hair oil as a Fertilizer prominent church on Fifth Avenue (not 
for Bald headed Organists.” during Lent) where the music played by a 

If organists would leave the selection of widely known organist and sung by the 
hymns with the minister where it belongs, congre g a tion was the simple gospel hymns; 
and devote more effort to training the choir wbde yeal - a f be r year the regular Sunday 
to sing them intelligently with a distinct serv ; ces j n tbe same c h U rch with the music 

enunciation, there would be less justice in confined tQ an organist ’ s ideal of “high 

the common crFic'sm ffiat rnost cho.rs sing ^ finds ^ ^ ^ paft j y fil le d '’., 
in an unknown tongue because naraiy a o . r „„ cr , n ’> 

word can be understood by the listeners. Yet There is a reason . 


H«/ r 


Go 


If 

Printers 


The Treatme nt of Hymn Tunes 

By William Reed 

The Organ accompaniment to hymT _ The Playing Over 

ones should be not only appropriate, but al- First the organist should read through 
o interesting and subtly impelling. Some- .he text he is to accompany. This habit, 
thing can be done with most tunes, and a| once acquired, will enable him at a glance 
studious consideration of the ways and, and with a moment s thought to formulate 
means available will, if judiciously applied, a general scheme which later can be devel- 
repay effort in this direction. _ 

A general review of what is c 
may be thus summarized 


ITEMIZED "PRICE LlsfTndSAMPLES 
THE MUSIC SUPPLEMENT OF THIS MAGAZINE IS PUNTED BT US 
\Wim-TD US ABOUT ANYTHING IN THIS UNE > 

PHILADELPHIA, PA.' , 


(a) A sympathetic 
maintained. 

(b) Variety of registration within cer¬ 
tain limits. 

(c) Considerations as to Touch, Accent, 

Use of Pedal, etc. 

(d) Such reinforcement on occasion as 
will assist and uphold the pitch. 


,■ „ part harmony, and 

atmosphere, well t n the case of unfai 


oped and varied. 

Second, in announcing a tune, it is well 
to play it exactly as written, viz. in four- 
_iart harmony, and as clearly as possible. 
In the case of unfamiliar tunes, the melody 
is best played solo-wise. Sometimes, other- 
,wise, (and provided its construction per¬ 
mits) it is sufficient to play over merely 
the two last lines of a familiar tune. 

The pedal helps to emphasize a robust 
tune: ordinarily, reserved,, its entrance 
later will enchance the effect, as well as 
arrest the attention. 


PHILIPSBORN’S _ 

Dept. 121, Chicago 

| postpaid. 

I Name - 

I AM*, 


























































































unflincWnEfe 

organist to stimulate and control the smg 
ine of large congregations. 

A good effect is obtained by sometimes 
nlavine the concluding lines of a u 




Individual Stanzas 

To ensure a good start, the registration 
of the first stanza should be of a general, 
hearty nature, due attention also being 
given to emphasis and a non-legato touch. 
As the hymn proceeds, these means may be 
somewhat relaxed, but they should be 
again resorted to if the singing drags or 
't h droos And all this is to be done 





TIIE ETUDE 

Reinforcements, etc. 
Reinforcement may be effected by:— 

(a) The Swell and Crescendo Pedals 

(b) A temporary doubling of the inner 

(c) The addition of 8', 4', and (rarely) 
16' registers. It should be noted 

that 2' registers should be avoided in 
hymn playing. 

The following will serve as illustrations. 



The doubling of the melody an octave 
higher is useful once in a while, but it is 
device to be witheld as a general rule. 
Sudden effects of cresc. and dim. are of 
no particular use. They arc apt to create 
a halting and irritating effect. 

The Tremolo is best avoided. Its atmos¬ 
phere is cheap, and it interferes with the 

nitfh • 






THE etude 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 611 


New Musical Books Reviewed. 


Reflections of a Musician. By F. Marion Dictionary of Musical Compositions and 
Cloth bound. 73 pages Published Composers. By W. Edmund Quarry. Cloth 
L Sard G. Badger. Price, $2.00. . bound, 192 pages. Published byE P.Dut- 

by A musician of attainments in professional ton & Co., at $2.00. 

ti#s given us not a treatise on how to A book that should be in every musician’s 
11 niive fame in the art, but how to make the library, whethei student oi professional It 
achieve ree o£ b roa der, deeper, individual furnishes ready reference to almost every 
?.«„ For the musician who is striving first composition that can claim any degree of 
bi fi - 11 to be a man, and through that to musical value, " f ma "" 

serve humanity, the little book has a — *■ • 



Enthusiastic Letters'from Etude Readers 

&IS 3 HIlsi sars 



_ sEsagss? 


BASE YOUR MUSIC TEACHING 

ON SOUND FUNDAMENTAL EDUCATIONAL WORKS 

The Fundamental Educational Works listed below have been used and tested 
and found effective by the leading educators in the country. These Works are 
STANDARD in the sense that they lay a Foundation upon which can be built a 
lasting music edu cation. _——————====^= 

THE VERY FIRST LESSONS AT THE PIANO 


STANDARD INSTRUCTIO N BOOK FOR BEGINNERS. _ 

THE CHILD AT THE PIANO. By Meda Z. Steele.Price, 75 cents 


GRADED STUDIES FOR THE PIANO. 

Seven Books for Two Hands. Grades I-\ 
Etudra.^S^ong^Acccunpaniments, a ^ e ^j,^ e . 


$ 5:S2 


KEYBOARD 


By Anna H. Hamilton. TwoVols. .. 


AND TRANSPOSITION 


PRELIMINARY STUDIES IN KEYBOARD HARMONY AND 
TRANSPOSITION. 40 




PIANO TECHNIC FOR CHILDREN—A Complete System P,i«, 1LS0 

PEDAL STUDIES. B, M™. Crab, Ad,m, Pra.,Sl.o« 

?„ e t aC br™^n H pUs ike PRINCIPLJSS Chat 1 CONTROL 

PRACTICAL SCALE BUILDER, for Major and Minor Scales 


LESSONS IN SIGHT READING AT THE PIANO 


THE MUSIC STUDENT’S SPELLING BOOK 

By Mrs. Crosby A 


H0ME .p— 3S _ 

FIRST HOME STUDIES FOR TEN FINGERS 

By Calvin B. Cady.Books I and 11, 50 cents; Book III, 75 cent 

THE MUSIC STUDENT’S LESSON RECORD 

By L 


SSEHslHl; sw “«Si?3S 

CLAYTON F. SUMMY CO., PtiblisHers 

429 S. Wabash Avenue, Chicago 

Eastern Agency: HAROLD FLAMMER, Inc. 57 W. 45th St., New York City, N. Y. 

^^iiU h u e m U oTt^« a in X and aCCUrate,y WUh 































































































































































































Page 612 SEPTEMBER 1921 


THE ETUDE 




* a 


'•i 

J 


r fg|j 

mAj 



Department for Violinists 

Edited by ROBERT BRAINE 

.. /, All Would Ploy Fin t Violin We Could Get No Orchestra Together.”- R. SCHUMANN 



The Violinist Should Study 
the Piano 

A correspondent asks if it is “necessary 
to; study the piano in order to become a 
successful violinist.” 

While many violin students do not study 
the piano; they would become better 
violinists if they did. The violin is pri¬ 
marily a melody instrument, and the vio¬ 
linist who studies the violin alone, fails to 
get the complete idea of compositions. 
The piano is complete in itself, and a 
student who studies such an instrument 
naturally gets a broader and more complete 
knowledge of music, than one who studies 
a single part. 

Many of the most famous concert 
violinists of the day are excellent pianists 
as well, and it is safe to say that almost 
all of them have a fair working knowledge 
■ of the piano. Some time ago a concert was 
given in New York, in which a number 
of famous violinists participated. They 
took turns in playing the piano accompan¬ 
iments for each others’ solos, adding very 
much to the interest of the occasion. 

The young violin student who is destined 
for the profession, should not fail to 
study the piano as well. Studying the two 
instruments, it is surprising how one helps 
the other, and how rapidly the young 
violinist progresses on both instruments. 

As an instance of this, I remember the case 
of Francis Macmillen, the well known 
American concert violinist, whom I had 
the honor of instructing for the first four 
years of his studies. He was an enthusi¬ 
astic student of the piano, in addition to 
the violin, and when he was nine years of 
age was almost as proficient a pianist as 
violinist At that early age I remember 
that he gave a public recital, lasting an 
hour and a half, the first half of the pro¬ 
gram consisting of solo works for the 
piano, and the latter half of violin solos. 
He received equal applause for his work 
on both instruments He is still a capable 
pianist. 

Another advantage which accrues to the 
violinist, who is an expert pianist as well, 
is that of being able to study the accom¬ 
paniments to his violin pieces, and figure out 
the most effective ways of playing them. 
If he is an expert and artistic pianist who 
understands the piano playing thoroughly, 
he can then instruct his accompanist as to 
how he wishes the accompaniment to be 
played. Only the kings in the profession 
of violin playing can afford, to employ 
great accompanists, who understand their 
professions thoroughly. The value of a 
good accompanist cannot be overestimated. 
Many of the European violinists in their 
world tours, take an accompanist with 
them, being unwilling to trust to picking 
uo local accompanists in the countries they 
visit. The late Pablo Sarasate, the famous 
Soanish violinist, had as his accompanist 
Mme. Bertha Marx, and she accompanied 
him in all his world tours. Almost all the 
other great violinists have their favorite 
accompanists, who from long continued 
co-operation know their style, and their 
ideas of all the compositions in their 
repertoire. 

Lesser violinists have to rely on all sorts 
of accompanists, and it is a distinct advan-. 
tage if they have enough pianistic ability 
to give their accompanists the proper ideas 
as to just how the accompaniments should 


be played, and how to bring out the 
various effects in them. 

The violin teacher is under a heavy dis¬ 
advantage if he cannot play the piano. 
After a student has worked out the technic 
of a violin composition reasonably well, 
his progress in . fully mastering .it, is 
wonderfully accelerated, by having his 
teacher occasionaly play the piano accom¬ 
paniment with him. He hears the ac¬ 
companying, harmony, the counter melo¬ 
dies, and all the various effects as a 
whole, as the composer intended them; 
and he grasps the idea of the composition 
in half the time that we would if he 
played the violin part without hearing the 
accompaniment. The pupil also enjoys 
his lesson much better if his teacher can 
play the piano parts to his solo work. I 
have not the slightest doubt that the violin 
teacher who is also a skillful pianist, can 
get and hold from SO to 100 per cent more 
pupils, than the teacher who cannot play 
the piano. 

Piano playing to the violin teacher be¬ 
comes doubly useful when he gives a 
pupils’ recital. If the teacher plays the 
accompaniments, the pupils will play twice 
as well as they would with a strange 
accompanist, because the teacher plays the 
tempos exactly as he has taught them to 
the pupil, and all the expression, nuances, 
and the conception of the compositions 
are the same. In addition the teacher can 
follow his pupils better and can cover up 
little slips which they are certain to make. 
Last and probably the most important of 
all is the confidence the pupil feels with 
his teacher at the piano, making him much 
less likely to suffer from stage fright or 
nervousness. 

Another important advantage to the 
violinist, of playing the piano, is the fact 
that it gives him another source of income, 
if necessary. Many violin teachers, espe¬ 
cially in the smaller towns, teach the piano 
as well. Then there is the chance of play¬ 
ing piano with small orchestras, or if he 
has studied the organ as well, of playing 
the organ in church. I have known many 
violinists, who would have had to give up 
the profession alogether, if they had relied 
on the violin alone, but who were able to 
make a comfortable income by eking out 
their earnings from the violin by piano 
teaching and playing. 

There are not a few conservatories, 
where it is obligatory to study the piano, 
no matter what other instrument one is 
making his principle study. This seems to 
me an excellent idea. The violin student 
studying for the profession will find it 
of the greatest possible advantage, to gain 
as thorough and comprehensive knowledge 
of the piano as he possibly can. 


Little Hints 

W hen a steel E string has been put on, 
and there is a surplus length at the peg, 
this surplus end of the string should not 
be left sticking straight out from the 
string box, as the end is sharp as a needle 
and is apt to prick the fingers when the 
violin is tuned. It is best to cut the sur¬ 
plus end of the string off with a pair of 
wire clippers, and then bend the end of the 
wire into a little loop which sticks down 
into the string box, out of the way. 


A System for the Study of 
Whole and Half Steps in 
Violin Playing 

By James Mercer 

The scale of C major, the model upon 
which all other major scales are con¬ 
structed, has five whole steps and two nan 



A whole step consists of a chromatic 
and a diatonic half-step When spaced 
upon the finger-board of the violin, 
twice the distance of the ha f ' s ^ 

The half-steps in the scale, coming be 
tween E-F and B-C or degrees 3-4 and 
7-8 are the most important feature of the 
scale; and form the basis upon which this 
article is written. . 

Referring to the scale of C major, the 
brackets show F and C as half-steps, and 
these half-steps being only half the dis¬ 
tance of whole steps, F and C are tail¬ 
ing tones,” or tones played one half-step 

'°As”all major scales are constructed upon 
the same plan of whole and half-steps, one 
rule will answer for all; e. g., the fingers 
which take the fourth and eighth degrees, 
of any major scale, “must fall” (must be 
played one half-step lower). 



halt step half step 



The Minor Scale 

Taking the scale of A minor and ar¬ 
ranging it below its relative major, we find 
both scales having identically the same 



and the falling tones of C major become 
the falling tones in A minor, only appear¬ 
ing upon different degrees of the scale; 
e. g., 2-3 and 5-6, and are played one half¬ 
step lower. 

The minor scale also appears in two 
other forms,' called harmonic and melodic; 
but these have one or more of their tones 
altered; c. g., . 


4 Harmonic 




But these altered notes do not chan 
the fundamental rule. In the harmoi 


scale, C and F fall one half-step and G# 
is an altered or raised note. In the me¬ 
lodic scale C falls one half-step and F# 
and Git are altered or raised notes. 

Transposition 

The same principles apply in transpos¬ 
ing from one key to another ; e. g., 



The falling tones of G major become 
the falling tones in E flat major, or half¬ 
steps. All other tones arc whole steps. 

A thorough study of these falling tones, 
which appear in all scales, and the princi¬ 
ple may be applied to any music, will 
prove of the greatest benefit, both in re¬ 
gard to purity of intonation and a more 
comprehensive understanding of the pecu¬ 
liarities of the instrument. 

Imitative Violin Music 

There has always been much discussion 
among critics as to how far a composer 
could go in distinctly imitative music with¬ 
out transgressing the rules of good art. 
Such music is called “program” music. 
The great variety of sound- which can be 
made on the violin, causes composers to use 
this instrument for imitating a vast number 
of sounds in nature and life. There is a 
great sameness in the tones of other instru¬ 
ments, but the violin can be played not only 
with the bow, but the strings can be played 
pissicato, giving effects like the harp 
or guitar, or other similar instruments. 
Then the use of natural and artificial 
harmonics giving effects like the flute, 
flageolet, the horn, and other wind instru¬ 
ments, opens up a vast range of sounds, 
quite different from the ordinary tones 
of the violin. Imitative effects of this 
character are freely and legitimately em¬ 
ployed by composers in writing violin solo 
music, and the violin parts in orchestral 
compositions. 

H. Leonard, the well known French 
composer and violinist, went a step further 
when he wrote his well known “Scenes 
fHumoristhucs, Op 61, five descriptive 
pieces”. These pieces are as follows: Coq 
et Poules (Rooster and Hens), Au Fonds 
des Bois (In the dark Woods), Chaffeft 
Souris (Cat and Mice), L’Anc ct V Amec 
(Donkey and Driver), Serenade du Laftn 
Belliquex (Serenade of the martia 
Rabbit). 

These pieces are written in a humorous 
vein, and are all directly imitative as their 
titles would suggest. In the Donkey_ an 
Driver, the “hee-haw” and braying of t e 
donkeys are imitated. At one point it is 
indicated to bow on the tail-piece, the bow 
then glancing off to the short ends of tn 
string between the bridge and the ta ' 
piece. This imitates the braying of 
donkey in the manner of vaudeville tn 
violinists, who imitate the grunting of P'S ’ 
the braying of donkeys, etc., in this way- 


THE ETUDE 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 613 


VIOLINS BUILT IN OUR OWN 
WORKROOMS 

Of Finest Material and Workmanship 


OUR “SPECIAL” 

OCr 10Tested Lengths, 
4D L Silk Violin E, for 

Send for Violin and Cello Catalogue 

MUSICIANS SUPPLY CO. 

60 Lagrrange St., Boston, Mass. 


STUDY HARMONY 
and COMPOSITION 
by MAIL 

sss 

ALFRED WOOLER, Mu». Doc. 
322 W. Utica Si., Buffalo, N. Y. 




9 


THE MOST ELEMENTARY 
METHOD FOR THE VIOLIN 

Bel Canto Violin Method 

BY MABEL MADISON WATSON 

Price, $1.25 

A method that makes teaching and study 
pleasurable and combines the art of melody 
playing with foundation technic. 

THEO. PRESSER CO., Philadelphia, Pa. 


Notice, to All Kinds of Violinists 


>u with everything yo 


STUDENTS' VIOLINS, fre 


"GEMUNDEB ART" t 


BOWS^ from $3^00 to $50.00; pernambuco^wood. from 

of relcrerwes m instnP mentis'taken in’part’ payment 
at tholr v.uue. Time payments arranged for violins 
from S50 upwards. Repairing and Reconstruction. 
Correspondence invi ted. Catalogues. 

nuGUST gemUnder a sons 


be Instructive Magazine 


AKADEMIE & ETERNELLE 

Silk Strings 

LA FAVORITA & ELITE 

Gut Strings 

For Sale by Leading Importers and Jobbers 

Sole Distributors M. E. SCH0ENING CO., Inc. 


In the Rooster and Hens we have imi¬ 
tations of the cackling of fowls, and in the 
Cat and Mice, the rushes of the cat, and 
squeaking of the mice. 

With an ordinary audience these pieces 
are of course immensely popular and 
effective; for if there is anything which 
people who have not had a musical educa¬ 
tion dearly love, it is imitative and descrip¬ 
tive music. 

Of the above series of descriptive pieces 
the “Serenade of the Martial Rabbit”, is 
probably the most artistic. It can be used 
on good programs, as a novelty, and never 
fails to create a sensation, if well played. 
Leonard got the idea for the composition 
from one of the mechanical toys,—in this 
case a warlike rabbit—which are so popu¬ 
lar in France. The piece opens with the 
rabbit playing the drum, represented by a 
series of chords struck by the stick of the 
bow instead of the hair (col legno, as it 
is marked). 


This illustration represents the drum¬ 
ming of the rabbit and is played with the 
wood (back) of the bow and not with 
the hair. The three notes slurred to¬ 
gether should be played with the bound¬ 
ing bow. While these chords are being 
played, the piano plays a pleasing melody. 
The rabbit is then supposed to play the 
bugle, and then a march movement in 
double stops. The composition ends with 
the same drumming effect, with the back 
of the bow, and an imitation of the spring 
(in the clockwork by which the toy is 
operated) stopping. 

These compositions are quite extensively 
used in France, and it is surprising that 
they are not used more generally by 
American teachers, as novelties; since they 
always can be calculated upon to delight 
mixed audiences. American editions of 
these pieces are available. 


Blue Serge 

Suit ^ 


Elaborately 

Embroidered 

withSilkFloss 


Ricochet Bowing 


ISAXOPHONE 

j Just out—complete catalog CD EC 

■ of latest jazz hits, also Stan- ■ 

■ dard saxophone solos, duets, trios, 

■ quartettes-2000 selections. Largest 
W, general dealers of saxophone music 

\Xf and supplies in the world. Expert re- 
P airing - Said for free catalog today. 
SAXOPHONE SHOP, 423 S. Wabash A«e., Chicago 

Hi Are lou Organizing an Orchestra or Band? 

clfeTt*™ a°id’Band 6 Books’ 8 Boot’S'bEGINNERS 

? l me™?™ R of^S?ROOT*S , NEWBEGINNERS 

BAND BOOK No. 1. Fine lor schools, convents, or 
We puwKthfr “Sybooks both secular and sacred 
Samples sent to Teachers and Band Leaders tree 

E° T.^OOT & SONS, 1530 E. SSih St., Chicago, III. 


A correspondent sends a passage taken 
from the Fifth \Air Varii by Dancla, and 
asks how it can be most effectively bowed. 


There is only one way to bow this pass¬ 
age, and that is with ricochet bowing as it 
is marked. The word ricochet means 
bouncing or bounding. This bowing is 
best done near the middle of the bow 
where the stick best responds. The bow 
is thrown lightly on the string so that it 
will rebound as pulled along (down bow 
in the example) thus making the two 
thirty-second notes. A very small amount 
of bow is used where only two notes are 
played; an inch or two is all that is neces¬ 
sary. Many fail in learning to execute 
this stroke because they hold the bow down 
on the string after the first note, thus pre¬ 
venting it from rebounding, which it will 
do, like a rubber ball if given the chance. 

Ricochet bowing can be performed with 
either down or up bow; but it is much 
easier with the down bow. Care must be 
taken to give the notes their proper value, 
many players failing to acquire sufficient 
control over this bowing to play passages 
in correct time. It should be practiced on 
the open strings at first. Two, three, four, 
or more notes should be practiced with 
this bowing. The illustration of a stone 
skipping several times on the surface of 
the water when skilfully thrown, often 


gives the student a mental picture of this 
bowing. 

The wrist does not consciously control 
each note in a ricochet passage, as the 
notes are produced solely by the rebound¬ 
ing of the bow. Constant practice will 
enable the violin student to control the 
rapidity of this rebounding. 

The student usually gets his first idea of 
this bowing by playing the two notes to be 
played ricochet very slowly, lifting the 
bow off the string between the notes. 
Having thus obtained an idea of the direc¬ 
tion of each stroke, he can try throwing 
the bow down’ on the string and letting it 
rebound. The bow must be pulled along, 
otherwise the rebounds cannot be made. 

Passages in ricochet where the notes (as 
in the example) are the same, are much 
easier than where a different finger must 
be used each time the rebounding bow 
strikes the string. A passage of this kind 
is given below. 



The bow is thrown on the open string E 
with the down stroke. It rebounds and as 
it strikes the string the second time, the 
first finger must be in place on the E 
String to make the note F sharp. As the 
bow strikes the string the third time the 
second finger must be in place to make the 
note G sharp. The speed of the stroke 
when the bow is thrown upon the string 
controls the rapidity of the rebounding. 


QUICK! 

Order How 

by 

Ho. 5M516 


Rare Quality and Style at an Amazing Bargain Price 

Who ever heard of such a suit at such a ridiculously low price? Good 

Act Now! = 

But voufmuatfret you^order^in today—^suctaVaal 

GORDON'S CLOAK HOUSE 


How the Busy Amateur Violinist Can Keep in Practice 

John P. Labofish 


DEEP, MELLOW, SOULFUL- 
ON CREDIT. Easy terms for 

wonderful instruments. GET 

DETAILS TO-DAY. 

V - HENN denver, col. 


NOUNS 



Every once in a while I meet someone 
who once was a good amateur violinist, 
hut who lost his taste for ICreutzer and 
Fiorillo when he stopped taking lessons, 
and now hardly ever touches his instru¬ 
ment. He says, “I wish I could keep up. 
my playing, but I cannot afford to spend 
two or three hours a day on exercises, so 
I have just let it drop.” 

I have not taken lessons for about eight 
years, and at times I did not play for 
months. Not long ago I made myself a 
schedule of practice that has put me back 
into fairly good playing condition without 
much work. I hope that all persons 
. similarly situated will try it. Here it is: 

1. Finger exercises without the bow—5 

minutes. , 

Carl Flesch’s Urstudten or the Nemusier 
will give plenty of exercising material for 
strengthening and freeing the fingers, and 
shaping the hand to the violin. 

2. Bowing exercises on open strings—10 


Bates “Bow Control Exercises.” I be¬ 
lieve these exercises give more specific 
results for the time spent on them than 
the more complete works of Sevcik and 
others. The student should exercise him¬ 
self in all the bowings in Bates’ book 
every day. 

3. Shifting exercises—5 minutes. 

Two or three lines a day from Bytovetz- 
ski, Bryant or Siegfried Eberhardt. These 
will cure bad intonation, the thing that 
makes so many enemies for the “rusty” 
violinist. 

4. Scales and arpeggi—10 minutes. 

One scale a day from David’s “Violin 

School, part 2.” Play it in every way 
you can—long scale, arpeggio, broken 
thirds and thirds, broken sixths and sixths, 
octaves, tenths, etc. 

When you have finished one half hour 
of this kind of practice, you will be able 
to enoy yourself with solos, overtures, or 
any of the other things that make amateur 
“fiddling” such a pleasure. 



Free Trial S? 

perfectly satisfied, pay foyt oneasyy 
complete catalog will be mailed free. (2C) 

BUESCHER BAND INSTRUMENT CO. 

Makers of. Everything in Band and Orchestra Instruments 

3226 Buescher Block, Elkhart, Indiana 


Violin Strings 

etude brand 

Used by the Leading Artists of the 
Philadelphia Cicheslra 

Etude “E” String, 3 lengths.. . .$0.20 net 

Etjide “A” String, 2 lengths.20 net 

Etude “D” String, 2 lerglbs.20 net 

Ttu ’e “G” String, 1 lergih.20 net 

Bundle Lots (30 assortrd Strings) 4.25 net 

’Prices Qioen Jlre SYef—SYo ‘Discount 

THEO. PRESSER CO. Phikdelphia, Pa. 


Please mention THE ETUDE when addressing 

























































































Page GH SEPTEMBER 1921 


THE ETUDE 



Professional Directory ^ 

™_1_ ARNOLD 


in different keys, the fingers assume dif- quisition of speed confic 
ferent groupings or combinations accord- ligence m sight reading, 
ing to the location of the major and minor Most useful perhaps, is 
seconds (whole and half steps). For of the Combinations to tl 
example on the a string, in the key of C tery of difficult details of 
fingers 1 and 2 are together, while fingers The music may be marke 

By 3 e and 4 ^ ^ ^ 


BROWN-"^ssss; SSSSS 
BEEGHWOODSSSsS B URROWET^ SS. f 'I- 

coMBsrrg* ^ chicago^^s “HSiE 


_ „_CINCINNATI SaS^JSSsa ffS^JTtSSSfi...- 

—**■ »■» MBlFSS^ tEBHH 

FABRI Sffi ggS QAHHIPETERSENSSZ 

GILBERT ^gSSSS DETROIT 'WSSSB*- sSjSrH'3 

(4th) then / (1st finger on the r string) 



FHETTEVIlUg^l 


the etude 


New Time Saving 
Methods in Business 

They result from 
the purchase of an 

UNDERWOOD 

BOOKKEEPING 

MACHINE 

It will demonstrate 
how your office 
can cut down its 
overhead. 

UNDERWOOD TYPEWRITER CO., INC. 


How to “Arrange” for Small Orchestra 


Ex. 3 


By Edwin H. Pierce. Part III 

Editor’s Note.—Thousands of musicians and music lovers 
about the orchestra, particularly the small orchestra. The \ 
given to orchestras in public schools and high schools has prompte 
the following article, the first of a series which will run for sever 
Pierce, former Assistant Editor of “The Etude,” has had long pri 
in this subject and has conducted many small orchestras. He ex. 
in such a simple manner that anyone with application should be able 
his suggestions without difficulty. “The Etude” does not attempt 
correspondence in any study, but short inquiries of readers interests 
will be answered when possible ] 

The Orchestral Piano Part 
In arranging a piano piece for orches¬ 
tra, it is quite possible simply to leave the 
piece as it stands, in the piano part, but 
the effect is vastly improved if the part 
be re-arranged. That is done by omitting 
(in general) the melody, and using the 

two hands of the player more simply and ——- 

efficiently for bass and chords. Thus, in it would sound well 
Moszkowski’s Serenata, the two first part as written, thus 
measures need no alteration, but beginning lins and other instrume 
with the third measure, we change it from merely accompanying the 
Then, too, there are m 
a part may be “cued in” 
piano copy, with advantage, 
daily the case with the flute 
stance, take the twenty-four 
this same piece: 




SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 615 

BanishWrinkles 

My Methods Have Restored 
Beauty to Thousands 
read my Free offer 

Le»t me rid vou of Wrinkles, Pimples, Blackheads, 
Freckles, Coarse Pores and Superfluous Hair 



/5 

« f T° 

r f ,-h 



t r -red 



DREAM 
VOYAGE 

SONG BY 

VICTOR YOUNG 

ALICE VERLET ac¬ 
claims it — “A '•charming 

MANY OTHER LEADING ARTISTS 
A DREAM VOYAGE 




THURLOW LIEURANCE 

COMPOSER-PIANIST 

CONCERT OF SONGS, 
STORIES AND LEGENDS 

of the 

AMERICAN INDIAN 

Assisted by 

EDNA WOOLEY 


GEORGE B. TACK, Flutist 

Now Booking—Season 1921-22 

Management 

Eastern : Western : 

J. W. DRAIN, HORNOR-WITTE, 

1712 Chestnut St.. 3000 Troost Avo¬ 



ir the melody to the violin part, 
is the general procedure, but 
e exceptions: for instance at the 
h measure, where the tones are 


This is essentially a passage proper for 
flute. It might be given to violin, but 
would be very difficult for anj 
amateur player, consequently it 
best to retain it in the orchestral piano 
part, marking it, however, "flute.” Other 
parts frequently cued 
occasion demands are 

drums. Of course, this ...- 

as a mere makeshift, but it is 

(To be i 


Poise, and How to Obtain It 

By Chas. Johnstone, Mus. Bac. 


What is poise? Applied to Music, a 
definition, perhaps most easily understood, 
would be “self-control,” or “self-possess¬ 
ion.” In all matters of performance, 
public or private, in Music or any other 
art, this is a most necessary thing to have. 
Its lack may be evidenced in many forms. 
The player, singer, or reader, whose dan¬ 
ger of breaking down makes the cold chills 
run down the back; the speaker who 
flounders around, trying to find a way out 
of some sentence he has started; the per¬ 
son loosing his temper because he is getting 
worsted in an argument; all of these are 
illustrations of the lack of poise. 

How, then, shall we get this poise? The 
key to it lies in the axiom that knowledge 

IS POWER. 

There are four classes of performers. 
First, those who do not understand their 
subject and fully realize the fact. Second, 
those who do not understand their subject, 
but fail to realize the fact. Third, those 
who do, understand their subject, but are 
afraid for fear they will get stuck. Fourth, 
those who know their subject, and know, 
without any doubt, that they know it. 

The first class, in their lack of knowl¬ 
edge, display their wisdom by their silence. 
The ’ second are the “bumptious” ones; 
and, verily, they have their reward. The. 
third kind are an annoyance. The fourth 
are the only class of people worth listening 
to. If we know a thing, and know that 


we know it, we cannot be shaken from 
our position. 

It is just this knowledge, then, that gives 
us self-possession or poise. If we really 
understand a subject, we can explain every 
detail of it. And the reverse is equally 
true. If we cannot explain every detail of 
a subject, we don’t really understand it. 

Now, let us apply all this to the 
of the young student. Do you really un¬ 
derstand Time, Accent, Scales, Chords, In¬ 
tervals, Accidentals, etc., so that you can 
clearly define and explain their rules, and 
not be stuck by a rapid-fire cross-question¬ 
ing? Can you play any and every passage 
of your piece off-hand, without fear 
of making a-bungle of it? If you cannot 
do this, then your self-control is in dan¬ 
ger. Therefore, your first great care must 
be to know, and know that you know. 

A second help is a strong, clear brain. 
To this end one must cultivate the habit 
of Deep Breathing; as the amount of 
blood supplied to the brain depends upon 
this; and without this supply the mind 
cannot do its work effectively. 

A further aid is belief in one’s self. 
Pessimism never did any one any good. 
Persistence, and a will that won’t take 
denial are the two great factors of success. 
As already remarked, knowledge is 
power. This, and this alone gives power 
and poise. 



i FT IIS SEND YOU A FEW ETUDE CARDS FOR DISTRIBUTION AMONG 
LET TOURMUSICAL FRIENDS WHO SHOULD BE “ETUDEITES.” 


Gentle on Hosiery 

With the All-Rubber shrewdly 
fash ; oned Oblong Button the 

HOSE SUPPORTER 

holds the stocking in place 
securely—but without in¬ 
jury to the most delicate 
silk fabric. 

Sold Everywhere 

GEORGE FROST CO., BOSTON 

Makers ot the lamcus Boston Garter for Men 


Please mention THE ETUDE when addressing 
our advertisers. 







































































































































THE ETUDE 


Page 616 SEPTEMBER 1921 



New Low Rock-bottom Prices 
For Popular Magazines 

We are continually on the lookout to 
secure the best prices possible m order 
that we may offer them to our friends 
and subscribers. 

The list below represents some ol tne 
best publications and in every case,^ there 


Special Notices 

ANNOUNCEMENTS 


WANTED and FOR SALE 


Ms ISSS*** 



*2.00 I. Both $2.50 sW, Pn. ’ 

tv'-- 



THE ETUDE 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 617 



Schools and Collides 

CHICAGO—See Also Page 618 and 610 



CHICAGO'S FOREMOST SCHOOL OF MUSIC 



36th Session Commences September 12, 1921 

Offers superior courses in all branches of music and dramatic art, including Master School. 
Diplomas, Degrees and Teachers’ Certificates granted by authority State of Illinois, ihoroug 
preparation for concert, opera and teaching positions. Many special features, recitals, lectures. 
Two Excellent Dormitories Offer Accommodations at Moderate Hates 
UNSURPASSED FACULTY OF NINETY-FIVE ARTIST-INSTRUCTORS 
cAmong them might be mentioned: 


PIANO — Heniot Levy, Allen Spencer, Vic¬ 
tor Garwood,. Silvio Scionti, Louise Robyn, 
Kurt Wanieck, Earl Blair. 

VOICE — Karleton Hackett, Ragna Linne, E. 

Warren K. Howe, Charles La Berge. 
VIOLIN —Herbert Butler, Adolf Weidig, 


ORGAN—William Middelschulte, Frank Van 
Dusen, Herbert E. Hyde. 

MUSICAL THEORY, COMPOSITION - 
Adolf Weidig, Arthur O. Andersen, John 
Palmer, Leo Sowerby. 

VIOLONCELLO—Robert Ambrosius, Adolf 
Hoffman. 

and many others. 

ac, David Bisphs 


PUBLIC SCHOOL MUSIC —O. E. Robin- 


HARP—Enrico Tramonti. 

SCHOOL OF ACTING AND EXPRES- 
SION —Letitia Kempster Barnum, A. 
Louise Suess. Stage Training, Public Read¬ 
ing, Physical Expression, Dancing. 


GUEST INSTRUCTORS, 1921 - Josef Lhevin. 

7-> /f 1 . Tneludinv admission to Conservatory Recitals (by members of the faculty and advanced pupils); Teachers* Nor 

Free Advantages: SnTschool, Lectures; Students^ Orchestra, Vocal Sight Reading Class and A Capella Chou. 25 free compel, 
scholarships. (Examinations from Sept. 5 to Sept. 8. Apply for examination blank.) A Musical Bureau for securing positions. 

Lyceum and Chautauqua engagements secured 
Examinations Free . Catalog mailed free on application - Me 

AMERICAN CONSERVATORY, 571 Kimball Hall, Wabash Ave. and Jackson Blvd., Chicago 

JOHN J. HATT ST A ED 7\ President— Karleton Hackett, Adolf Weidig, Heniot Levy, Associate Directors 


LMSE FOEEST 
UMIVEI 

OF 


Courses in all branches of music, 
eluding piano, voice, theory, vie 
harp, wind instruments, etc. Special 
“Public School Music” course fitting 
young women for positions. 

Faculty of collegiate standing and 



MARTA MILINOWSKI 


Private Teachers 

NO TEACHER 


T» B aaryw q °dchase/ch^l a 

OF^USIQAL ARTS 

800 LYON A ND MEALY HUlLoiNG, CHICAGO, ILLINOIS 

A SCHOOL FOR TRAINING OF PROFESSIONAL MUSICIANS 

til Teache^cS?fl?at8 r anlf olplom^ M Writetor CurricSimTsOOLyonand Henly*Bldg., Chicago, 01. 

COSMOPOLITAN 
SCHOOL OF MUSIC 

AND 

DRAMATIC ART 

DR. CARVER WILLIAMS, President 

An eminent faculty of 60 artists. Offers to 
piospective students courses of study based 
upon the best modern educational principles 

Also courses in collegiate studies for students 
unable to attend university. Diplomas, De¬ 
grees and Teachers’ Certificates. Many free 

Sight Reading 

MADE EASY FOR PIANISTS 

sis 

mm 

CREATIVE PIAHO PLAYliS COURSE 

Public Schools and Private 

This course stresses PRINCIPLE instead 

J 

7 

VIOLIN—Mel V i n Martinson; ‘ ' M a r y 
DRAMATIC ART—Ellen G. Hill; Edna J. 

and how rectified-how to play 
accompaniments at sight-etc. 

Bradley^ Conservatory of Music 
All Branches of Music 

Compete Course in 5 tee.onehymait. $5.00 

°^-E* : Stanley Seder; Lester W. 

DANFORD HAIL CHICAGO 

Peoria - • - ' Illinois j 

C.Mc- 

1\ /FAKE THE SEASON 1921-1922 THE “BANNER SEA°ON” in Your 
JVI Study of Music. A careful perusal of pages 617, 618, 619, 620. 621 and 

Ta^un. SCHO ° L MUS,C “ J - B£aCh 

Fall Season Opens September 12 

622 of this issue will a< ; q Yelding sclTJol “ e 

student witn me renmrRduic auva.uu S co 
ind colleges. Many of these opportunities 
been equalled in America. 

j EdwbT Ij.^Steplmn^Wbfr.^Bo^E^^'^ 11 School, 








































































































































Page 618 SEPTEMBER 1921 


TIIE ETUDE 


JV UlO ~ ^ , ____ 

CtacagoMusical College 

FELIX BOROWSKI, President /Z"£^^T^Z 

FALL TERM NOW OPEN 

Faculty of More than 100 Teacher, including the following noted arti.ta: (Alph.behcallyArrajwed) 
PIANO VOCAL RICHARD CZERWONKY 

MAURICE ARONSON BELLE FORBES_CUTTER LOUISE^FERRARIS 


MAUK1LL nAL/iKown 

MOSES BOGUSLAWSKI 
BARTON BACHMANN 
EDWARD COLLINS 
HARRY DETWEILER 
GLENN DILLARD GUNN 
MAX KRAMM 
ALEXANDER RAAB 
LOUIS VICTOR SAAR 
C. GORDON WEDERTZ 


UUjL,L,Ej ru^Diio -- 

STANLEY DEACON 
EDOUARD DU FRESNE 
ROSE LUTIGER GANNON 
MABEL SHARP HERDIEN 
JOHN r 


JOHN B. MILLER 
ADOLF MUHLMANN ^ 
EDOARDO SACERDOTE 
BVRTON THATCHER 


LUUIhii mnoft 
MAX FISCHEL 
FREDERIK FREDERIKSEN 
MAURICE GOLDBLATT 
RAY HUNTINGTON 
LEON SAMETINI 

ORGAN 

CLARENCE EDDY 
ERIC DE lAMARTER 
HELEN W. ROSS 
C. GORDON WEDERTZ 

uADA/inMV rnMPnsiTION COUNTERPOINT, CANON AND FUGUE 
HARMONY, COMPUbll lUN, laura d. Harris barton bachmann 

FELIX BOROWSKI LOUIS VICTOR SAAR HAROLD B. MARYO INTFRPRFTATION 

TEACHERS’ NORMAL COURSES REPERTOIRE ANEMNTERPRETATION 

JULIA LOIS CARUTHERS (Piano) ritrtON THATCHER ~ GLENN DILLARD GUNN 

HAROLD B =P U MCHEL (Violin) SVcSs 
WALTON PYRE (Expression and Dramatic 

PUBLIC SCHOOL MUSIC 

HAROLD B. MARYOTT 


DRAMATIC ART AND EXPRESSION 

WALTON PYRE MINNA MAE LEWIS 


SCHOOL OF OPERA 

ADOLF MUHLMANN EDOARDO SACERDOTE 


All Orches 


aught 


FREE SCHOLARSHIPS 


OF THE TOTAL VALUE 
OF $20,000 


* aI (^ 1^0ijJ art ' a Vj’5j 1 °^ a .f s kiP 3 t C^ >6 aWa Q C< ^ jj e pia n o presenSi'for comp^ition'i^the Post°Gmduation, Graduation^ndSemor D^plo^r«^Classes'by th^Calile F'iai 

-Jassby the Mason & Hamlin Co. Conover Grand Piano presented tor competition in tne Entire Musical Education for competition in the Vocal Depu.imen 

JiSfbe' ^SdTS SSfflSSS^X~l <*-- W-T Orchestra. Opera Sch.hr.h.p 

15 prizes of $300 each; 15 of $100; 15 of $50 in the classes; also Diamond, Gold and Silver Medals 


56 th YEAR 


dormitory accommodations 


620 SOUTH MICHIGAN AVENUE 

(Next to Blackstone Hotel) 


COLUMBIA SCHOOL OF MUSIC 

CLARE OSBORNE REED, Director 

CHICAGO 

TWENTY-FIRST SEASON OPENS SEPTEMBER 5th 

Registration Days, September 1st, 2nd, 3rd 

SCHOOL YEAR, 44 WEEKS 

This is a remarkable advantage for prolonged study during the student year.' 

RESIDENT FACULTY OF 60 EMINENT MUSICIANS 

Many of whom are known throughout the musical world for the brilliancy of their attainments as artists and teachers 

EVERY BRANCH OF MUSIC 


N ormal T raining 

For piano teachers and those pre¬ 
paring to teach 

Normal Lectures 
Interpretation 
Keyboard Harmony 
Improvisation 
History of Music 
Dalcroze Eurythmics 
Observation—Childrens’ 
Classes 


Piano 

Classes for Artist 
Students 
Interpretation 
Repertoire 
Accompanying 
Teaching Material 
History and Ap¬ 
preciation 
Observation — 
C h i 1 d r en’s 


Theory 

Harmony — Ele- 
mentary and 
Advanced 
Melodic Construc¬ 
tion 

Analysis 
Composition 
Keyboard H a r - 


Voice 

Coaching 
Interpretation 
Repertoire 
Sight Singing 
Concert Work 
Oratorio 

Lyceum and Chau¬ 
tauqua 

Church Singing 
Community Sing¬ 
ing 

Chorus Singing 


Violin 

Advanced work 
for Orchestra 
and Professional 
Players 

Practical lessons 
for Teachers 

Ensemble 

Orchestra Con¬ 
ducting 

Lectures 

"su? * 


Public School Music 
Methods 

Methods 
Psychology 
Practice Teaching 
Choral Conducting 
Sight Singing 
Ear Training 
Orchestra Conducting 
Harmony 
Child Voice 




COLUMBIA SCHOOL OF MUSIC 


509 South Wabash Avenue 
CHICAGO 


*-• 


THE ETUDE 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 610 



'OBSERVATORY 

(INCORPORATED) 

A School of Music and Dramatic Art 

COURSES IN ALL BRANCHES 

MASTER FACULTY INCLUDING: 

Elias Day, President and Director of Dramatic Department 

Theodore Harrison, Director of Music Department and Teacher of Voice 
Lucille Stevenson, Vocal Department 
Maurice Rosenfeld, Piano Department 
Jeanne Boyd, Theory Deparment 

Katharine Howard-W ard, Organ and Piano Department 

Our two and three year courses leading to degrees, diplomas 
and teachers’ certificates enable our graduates to obtain splendid 
positions in the concert and teaching field. 

Over five hundred of our students are now filling successful 
positions throught the country. 

Fall Term Opens September 12, 1921 

Dormitories and studios in our own beautiful building in the 
heart of new art center, two blocks from Lake Michigan, North 

side. 

Write Secretary for free catalog. 

JEANNE HOWARD, 1160 N. Dearborn St., 


Chicago College of Music 

ESTHER HARRIS DUA, President 

27th YEAR OPENS SEPTEMBER 5th, 1921 

S3BSH2S8KS 


as*irjHutae. 

Recital to be given best singer. 

Address for free catalog, DEPT. 23 

1* > 34 KIMBALL BUILDING A. G. dua. Manage CHICAGO, ILL. 


HUNTINGTON COLLEGE CONSERVATORY «e»SlS,S 

Music Department ol Hantington^ ' d ^te W not make a mone^ ly Facuit^or e un 8 aueBtioned standing! 

of advantages at very low ^ 6 VOICE, HARMONY, HISTORY OF MUSIC, PUBLIC 

Courses Offered : school music,languages, expression and dramatic art 

” Giving Teachers Practical Work Applicable to Their Needs 

'boarding facilities excellent-no better anywhere 
pleased tojurn^ah^fun Address, Box 512 - - - HUNTINGTON, INDIANA 




"1 


j Jfow much is it possih/c fon/ou earn } 


THE ETVDE-THEO. PRESSER CO.. Publishers, Philadelphia. Pa. 


Known for Democracy, Economy, Hard Work 

CONSERVATORY 


MUSIC 


Opens 
Sept. 21 st 


T HE Conservatory occupies a beautiful building devoted 
exclusively to its own use. In the building are forty^ i 
eight practice rooms, each containing a piano. In addition;' 
there are large studios and special rooms for Harmony. 
For recitals, ensemble work, etc., there is a Recital Hall, 
thoroughly furnished with every appliance for such work. 

A complete and broad musical education based upon the best 
modern American and European principles is offered in: 

PIANO, VOICE, VIOLIN, ALL ORCHESTRAL INSTRUMENTS 

Musical Theory, Harmony, Counterpoint, 
Composition, Musical History, Appreciation 

PUBLIC SCHOOL MUSIC, EAR TRAINING, SIGHT SINGING 
CHORUS and OPERATIC CLASSES 

FULLY EQUIPPED ORCHESTRA OF 40-50 MEMBERS UNDER 
AN EXPERIENCED SYMPHONY CONDUCTOR 
WITH EUROPEAN REPUTATION 

LYCEUM ART COURSE 

Thorough preparation for Platform and Stage in 

VIOLIN, VOICE, PIANO, ALL ORCHESTRAL 
INSTRUMENTS and in DRAMATIC ART 
SPECIAL COACHING FOR PROFESSIONAL 
MUSICIANS, ACTORS and READERS 

DEGREES, DIPLOMAS, TEACHERS’ CERTIFICATES 

LYCEUM and CHAUTAUQUA engagements secured 


The Faculty consists of highly educated and experienced 
Musicians of International recognition 

MODERATE TERMS 

STUDENTS MAY ENTER ANY TIME 

The Conservatory is located so near Chicago that it must 
compete with the best work done there, so that Valparaiso 
students have every advantage that they could possibly 
have in the city and at an expense not one-fifth as great. 

The low cost of all courses has not been brought about by 
sacrificing a high grade of instruction, but by applying 
business principles to the 


Cost of Living 


so that the most satisfactory accommodations for board 
and room may be had at $80.00 per quarter of 12 weeks 

For Free Catalog Address 

j. E. ROSSELER, President 

Box 6, University Hall, Valparaiso, Ind. 


























































































Page 620 SEPTEMBER 1921 


THE ETUDE 



Schools and Colleges 



NEW YORK 


Interested in Piano Playing ? 

Then you should know of 

The Virgil Method, Vols. I and II 
How When and Where to Pedal 
175 Piano Pieces and Studies (Grades I to VI) 
All by Mrs. A. M. Virgil 

(Graded catalog on request) 

You should know also 

The splendid instruments for Piano Practice called 

The Virgil Tekniklavierl Both full Piano size) 

The Bergman Clavier I 

Four and Two Octave Keyboards in Suitcases 
The Child’s Pedal (A pedal and footrest for the child) 

Also the well known 

VIRGIL PIANO CONSERVATORY 


120 West 72d St. 


Catalogs and full inforn 


NEW YORK CITY 


0 


Salvini School of Singing 

NINTH Mario Salvini, Director 

206 West 7 1st St. New York City Telep hone: Columbus 22 02 & 

—===== 15 

A singing school living up to highest standards of art. The direct way to the 
£ manager , producer and impresario. Opera, concert, church, J 

£ oratorio, musical comedy and teachers courses. c/2 

© PUBLIC APPEARANCES ^ 

U Courses for beginners, advanced students and courses of perfection for artists. = 

S Opera department endorsed by Gatti Casazza, D.rector General of Metro- 
S politan Opera House, Arturo Toscanini, Giorgio Polacco, Gennaro I a, ^ 

| and others prominent in the musical world. _ , . 3 

(5 The method used by Mr. Salvini and assistants is of the Italian School -C 
of Bel Canto, comprising: breathing and vocal gymnastics, voice plate- „ 

3 m ent, solfeggio, development, diction, phrasing, analysis of the voice, © 
v its scope, functions and possibilities, development of the vocal, rhythm: c 
a ca , and musica l faculties. Songs, ballads, arias, operas in the differ, nt 
“ original languages. n evenings Address correspondence 

MARIO SALVINI 206 Welt 71,t stree -l New York City^ 


0 


0 



New York School of Music and Arts 


\ Voice 

36th Season — \ s« g ei Kiibanst, 

October 4th, 1921 ’ 

Send for Circulars 
and Catalogue 


212 West Fifty-ninth Street 
New York City 


University of Rochester | 

Eastman Schoo 
of Music 

Founded by George Eastman 
ALF KLINGENBERG, Director 

AN ENDOWED MUSIC SCHOOL FOR 
PROFESSIONAL AND CUL¬ 
TURAL STUDY 

CHRISTIAN SINDING 

Engaged for Department of Composition. 

Faculty list includes for next 
year: T. H. YorkeTrotter, Joseph 
Bonnet, Harold Gleason, Arthur 
Alexander, Arthur Hartmann, 
Pierre Augieras, Raymond Wilson, 
Adelin Fermin, Gerald Maas, 
George Barlow Penny. 



150 Riverside Drive, 

New York City 

Beautiful location overlooking | 
Hudson River. 

Day and Boarding Pupils ? 

Ideal home life for refined, | 

cultured girls. 

Europe and America's Most | 

Eminent Teachers 

Voice, piano, organ, violin, harp and all | 
instruments. Dramatic art, dancing, | 

languages. Outdoor life and all recrea- \ 
tional and social advantages. 


i MUSICAL ANDE1 


INTERNATIONAL 

MRS. BABCOCK 


Also Church and Concert Engagement* 
CARNEGIE HALL, NEW YORK 



COURSES FOR 

PIANISTS 

ACCOMPANISTS 


PlAl'flTf^llOOL 

Carnegie JfalL New York. 


TEACHERS 

The SIGHT, TOUCH and HEARING System of Teaching. Write for booklet 


Study Music in New York 


THE SCUDDER SCHOOL 

for YOUNG WOMEN 
7 Buildings: Dormitory Accommodations 
West 72d Street at Riverside Drive 

MYKON T. SCUDDER. President 


MUSIC DEPARTMENT 
VICTOR BIART, Director. Lecturer on th 
History and Appreciation of Music 
McCALL LANHAM, Voice. Teacher c 
Singing in the American Institute c 
Applied Music. New York 
WINFIELD VEAZEY ABELL Piano. 
Formerly Director of the Hartford 
Conservatory of Music 
Assisted by teachers of string, wood and 


Whatever Your Plans, Purposes and Ambitions, 
Whatever Y ourProf iciency, LetusHearfromYou. 

English,French and Span! 


PhysicaDraming and recrea 

Dormitory accommodation! 
accomplished social direc 


i*k , rilmg. n «c' S 


The National Conservatory of Music of America Enr ^r y «r^kfdct^ 1,1 

* ” ~ * sd by Congress 

ler) 

fice also at Washington, D. C 


The only School of Music in the U. S. chart. 

(JEANNETTE M. THURBER, Fou 
W. 79th St., N. V. City 


- College of Fine Arts - 

Syracuse University 

Unexcei led advantages for the study of music. Facui 
ty of 20 specialists. Regular four-year course lead 
to the degree of Mus. B. Special certificate courses 

For catalogue and full information, address 
Registrar, Syracuse University, Syracuse, N. Y 


Crane Normal Institute of Music 

Training School for Superviiori ol Music 
v ( BOTH SEXES ^ 

form, music-history, chorus-conducting, methods, 
practice-teaching. _ Graduates hold important posi- 

53 MAIN ST., POTSDAM, NEW YORK 


JTHACA CONSERVATORY 

Special advantages to 

those looking to educa- X AUSIC 

tional or concert work. IVJ[ 

All instruments, Vocal, 

Dramatic Art and Physical Train¬ 
ing. Graduates of Musical, Public 
Speaking and Physical Training 
Departments eligible to teach m 
N. Y. State Public Schools. Dor¬ 
mitories and Concert Hall. 

MASTER COURSES 

with world-famous artists in all departments 
School of Piano Tuning In Connection 

School Year Opens September 22nd 
Address THE REGISTRAR, i DeWill Park. i.hica. N - 


SEE ALSO IMPORTANT 
NEW YORK SCHOOLS 
ON PAGE 621 


Please mention THE ETUDE when addressing 


THE etude 


SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 621 


Schools and Colleges 

SOUTHERN, PENNSYLVANIA AND NEW YORK 




Hfcf )«rtiirfmrhX 3 Bluf Ridge M 
North of Atlanta, Standard A:.B. course; .special. 


BRENAU •» Gainesville, 



School of Music 

OF 

I SHENANDOAH COLLEGIATE ' 
INSTITUTE 

LEADING SCHOOL OF MUSIC IN THE SOUTH ^ 
Ast for BookietFREE ” 8 L*BOXHoTDAYTON, VA. 


Atlanta Conservatory of Music tt = 


Peachtree and Broad Streets, Atlanta, Georgia 

MR. and MRS. CROSBY ADAMS 

Annual Summer Classes for Teachers of Piano 
for the Study of Teaching Material 

MONTREAT, N. C. 

''m ON TREAT, NORTH CAROLINA 


FOREST PARKSaS 

ision. Pub. Sch. Music, Ar , 

COLLEGE 


si)., Voice, Violin, Expr 






ESTABLISHED 1857 

nr a unnv CONSERVATORY 

T LADUU I BALTIMORE, MD. 


857^ -- 

One of the oldest and most noted Musu 

- Schools in America. 

rtuH Philadelphia 
Musical Academy 

instruraenta^and*^*? * Students’ Symphony O rches^ 

K? "«dS%3&£oS SMmpg}; 

Managing Director. 1617 Spruce St. 

T\ ■ M I Now in new building. 

II 1111 | Over 1300 students last 

1 # lilt!•!]&£“' 

Pittsburgh Musical Institute., Inc. 

—■— •~= al ‘ 1 ——- TffirXl 

^^^^ScKools and 

NEW YORK, CONTINUED FROM PAGE 620 

Institute «t Musical Art 

OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK 

Frank Damrosch, Director « 

An endowed school of music conducted 
solely in the interest of higher musical 
education and providing complete and 
comprehensive courses. 

SPECIAL PREPARATORY CENTRES in different 
parts of New York City and Brooklyn for children 

For catalogues address 

Secretary, 120 CLAREMONT AVE., 
NEW YORK CITY 

SKIDMORE 
SCHOOL OF ARTS 

CHARLES HENRY KEYES,Pli.D . 1 

Musfci”phy*icaf Ed«at1o1. rt SrtrrtIria'i Science; 
and General Course^ wit^reiated^subject:^ 

catalogu , SECRETARY 

Box J, Saratoga Springs, New York 

Please mention THE ETUDE 


mnm 


m- 


CONSEWArORXySuSIC 

PHILADELPHIA 

37th YEAR OPENS SEPTEMBER 12th 

shed faculty, original and scientific methods, individual instruc- 
eadth of culture and moderate cost, combined with efficient 
t, the COMBS CONSERVATORY affords opportunities 
not obtainable elsewhere for a complete musical education. 

All Branches. Normal Training Course For Teachers. Public Per¬ 
formance. (Four Pupils’ Recitals a week.) Orchestra and Band 
Departments. Two Complete Pupils’ Symphony Orchestras. 
Conductor’s Course. 

Reciprocal relations with University of Pennsylvania. 

SCHOOL OF INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION 

(Theoretical and Applied Branches Taught Privately and in Classes) 

Faculty: Gilbert Raynolds Combs, Piano, Hugh A. Clarke, Mus. Doc, Theory; Nelson A. 
Chesnutt, Voice; Russell King Miller, Organ; William Geiger, Mus.Bac., Violin, 

SUMMER SCHOOL 

Teaching in all branches will be continued during the Summer'under the personal instruction and super¬ 
vision of Department Directors. Work taken during.the Summer will be credited on regular courses. 

DORMITORIES FOR WOMEN th d 

tory pupils 1 ]have^dvantages^ot afforJed^i/a^^otiier'schod of^Muskn’Daily Supervised Practice, Daily 
SIX SPACIOUS BUILDINGS 

The only Conservatory in the State with Dormitories for Women 
A School of Inspiration, Enthusiasm, Loyalty and Success. 

Ulustfated Year Book Free 

GILBERT RAYNOLDS COMBS, Director 

Administration Building, 1331 So. Broad Street 


when addressing our advertisers. 


4 
























































































































































































Page 622 SEPTEMBER 1921 


THE ETUDE 



=0= 


ScWools and Colleges 



NEW ENGLAND AND MIDDLE WEST 


. Ne^tng'and , 
Conservatory 

OF MUSIC S.ZZX-;™ 


George W. Chadwick 

Director 

Located in the Music 

It affords pupils the eni 

t^SfacUitief for^str' 1 

Complete Curricult 


BOSTON, MASS. 

of America The Free Privileges , , 

nd atmosphere Of lectures, concerts and recitals, the opportum- 

. Its complete ties of enseinble^ practice 

;nt o er excep- able Advantages to the music student. 


Course 


inch of Music, applied and 


is Ralph L. Flanders, General Manag 


PERCY FULLINWIDER, Violinist 

Head of Violin Department 

LAWRENCE CONSERVATORY 

Appleton, Wis. 

A MASTER TEACHER 

Unusual opportunity for the serious student ol violin 
Write for free catalog and information. 

CARL J. WATERMAN, Dean 


The Courtright System of Musical Kindergarten 

Oldest and most practical system. Write for 
particulars of correspondence course, also or 
Spring Class to be held in North Carolina. 

Mrs. Lillian Courtright Cnrli, 116 gdno iro.,Bridgeport,Conn. 




Charles W Mol son Director Whn Otoo 


48 th Year 


DETROIT 

CONSERVATORY of 

■A BBS* Hp IP Francis L. York, M.A., President 

■ | l ltegagK I ■ Elizabeth Johnson,Vice-President 

Finest Conservatory in theWest 

Offers to earnest students courses of study based upon the best modern 
and educational principles. Renowned faculty of /0. Students 
orchestra, concerts and recitals. Diplomas and Degrees conferred. 
Teachers’certificates. Desirableboardingaccommodations. 

Fall Term Opens Sept. 12,1921 

UNRIVALED FREE ADVANTAGES 

fc'KffeffiE'SS ftSfttS: Sfdt &SUU .. 

Mus. Bac.; Ethel Littell, Alma Glock, Henry Lorch. 

Lechtwordt; M. Gray Fowler and 30 additional ^Vio Tharayk ^Zusman C 
Orgun-Francis L.York, M. A.; Alle D. Zui- Lewis Powell! Edna Ke 
dent a,- Mus. Doc. Brown. 

^ Theory, Harmony, Compositioir-AUe ZuMema.^Mus. Doc.—Pos- 

Mandolin and Guitar -Alexander G. Poll. 

Normal Training for Piano Teachers —Francis L. York. 

Public School Music and Drawing-Miss Hermine Lorch, Paul Honore. 

School of Expression —Miss Lilly Adela Darling, Ethlyn Briggs. 

Dancing —Etlilyn Briggs. 

Examinations Free. For Catalog 
and Other Information, Address 
JAMES H. BELL, Secretary, 5035 Woodward Ave., Box 7—Detroit, Mich. 



FALL TERM OPENS SEPT. 6™ 

One and Two Year Courses in Piano, Voice, V'foZin.O'-tfan, 
Public School Music, leading to diplomas recognized by the state. 

Send for free catalog. Dormitory accomodations. 

MacPHAIL SCHOOL 

MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. 

100 TEACHERS ONE OF THE LARGEST IN AMERICA 


CINCINNATI CONSERVATORY ofMUSIC. estabL 


CLARA BAUR, Found 



The College of Music of Cincinnati 


ELM STREET ADJOINING MUSIC HALL 

Music, Dramatic Art and Languages in all branches taught 
exclusively by experienced artist teachers. Dormitory lor 
young ladies. Advantages equal to most famous European 
institutions. For catalog, address, J. H. Thuman, Manager. 


TEACHER! Help yourself to SUCCESS 

by using the BURROWES Course of Music Study 

Classes conducted by 

Eya Frances Pike, D2289 W. 16,h S Us Angeles, Calif. Kathryn Jamieson, D.119 Powell Are.. Toronto, Ont 

Evaleen Parke, D 837 Clinton St., Carthage, Mo. Katharine Burrowes, D.246 Highland Aye. H.P.. Detroit. Mich. 

Write for Illustrated Booklets 

DETROIT INSTITUTE OF MUSICAL ART !£££?£ 

nuv RFVIirn WIT IT All/f.Q Pmeidont MIDDLE WEST 

A School which offers every advantage incidental to a broad musica 
70, Artist Teachers, including 12 of the leading members of the Detr 

FALL TERM OPENS SEPTEMBER 5th, 1 

Students May Register at Any Time For Catalogue, Addres 

5405 to 5415 Woodward Avenue 

I education 

oit Symphony Orchestra 

921 

is H. B. MANVILLE, Bus. Mgr. 

Minneapolis School of Music, 


ORATORY AND DRAMATIC ART 
WILLIAM H. PONTIUS CHARLES M. HOLT 

Director, Dept, of Music Director, Dramatic Art 

60-62 Eleventh St., So. MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. 

LARGEST SCHOOL OF ITS KIND IN THE WEST 

ALL BRANCHES OF MUSIC AND DRAMATIC ART 




DANA’S MUSICAL INSTITUTE 

WARREN, OHIO 

THE SCHOOL OF DAILY INSTRUCTION IN ALL 
BRANCHES OF MUSIC 

Ad*-. LYNN B. DANA, Pre.id.nt_ Deak E. WARREN, OHIO 


Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians 

New American Supplement 

SIX LARGE VOLUMES, BOUND IN CLOTH, ILLUSTRATED 


PRICE $20.00 —Easy Payment Terms Cheerfully Granted. 

THEO. PRESSERC0.,”7Mi“MCHECTSnjrsr;PHILA.,PA. 


Please mention THE ETUDE when addressing our advertisers. 


THE ETUDE 





JUNIOR* 


etude; 

CONDUCTED BY ELIZABETH A GEST 


Chronological List of 
Musicians 


A True Fairy Story 

By A. Y. W. 


By Julia E. Williams 

Have you copied all the lists in your note¬ 
book? If you have not, summer is a good 

time to copy the back lists. This is the 

seventh and there will be just one more for 

you to copy. 

1831—1907, Joseph Joachim, Born in Hun¬ 
gary. Violinist, composer and 
teacher. 

1833—1897, Johann Brahms, German. 

Composer. Follower of Bach and 
Beethoven, whom he considered the 
world’s greatest masters. 

1835— still living, Charles Camille Saint- 
Saens, French. Wrote his first sym¬ 
phony when sixteen years old. Or¬ 
ganist and composer. 

1836— 1891, Leo Delibes, French. Com¬ 
poser of ballets and operas. 

1837— 1911, Felix Alexandre Guilmant, 
French. Organist and composer. 

1840— 1893, Peter Ilyitch Tschaikowski, 
Russian. Composer and teacher, 
Best known work is “Symphony 
Pathetique”. 

1841— 1904, Antonin Dvorak, Bohemian. 
Visited America and his best known 
work “The New World symphony” 
is based on plantation melodies. 

1842— 1912, Jules Massenet, French. Com¬ 
poser. Best known opera is “Thais”. 
Taught in Paris conservatoire. 

1843— 1907, Edward Hagerup Grieg, Nor¬ 
wegian. Began to compose when 
nine years old. Helped to develop 
the National music of Norway. 
Composed many piano pieces and 150 

1844— 1908. Nicholas Rimsky-Korsakov, 
Russian. Composer, conductor and 
teacher. 

1845— still living, Leopold Auer, Hungar¬ 
ian. Violinist and great teacher of 

1848— still living, Vladimir de Pachman. 
Russian. Pianist, especially well- 
known for his playing of Chopin. 

1849— 1895, Benjamin Godard, French. 

1850— 1909. Ludwig Schytte, Danish. 
Composer. Pupil of Liszt. 

1853—1918, Teresa Carreno, Venezuelan, 
pianist and teacher of MacDowell. 




Letter Box 

Junior Etude : 

li taking this opportunity to let 1 
how I enjoy The Etude. I look t 
o getting it each month. T have tv- 
ny letters from Hawaii in the .Tun 
I.otter Box, so I thought I would wi 
Honolulu, the capital city of 


Hawaiian 

if some Junior Etude friend would ' 
to me I would gladly answer her letter, 
tell her all she would like to know 8 
these beautiful islands. 

From your friend. 

Ruth Doherty (Age 13). 

Honolu 


Once upon a time there lived a man 
named Valerus, who had studied milsic 
for many, many years. He was called 
the greatest musician in the world, and 
played before kings and queens, and 
great nobles. One night as he lay sleep¬ 
ing he dreamed of beautiful music, more 
beautiful than any he had ever heard. 
He awoke from his dream, and said to 
himself, “I will compose music like that 
and play it for all people, rich and poor. 
I am sure they will lead better lives be¬ 
cause of the beautiful thoughts it will put 
into their hearts. It is more noble to 
teach people to live true, pure lives than 
to play for kings and queens.” 

So he gave up playing at the court 
and lived in a garret in the heart of a 
great city. He, worked all the long days 
and far into the nights composing his 
dream music. He ate crusts of bread 
and slept upon a crude couch, for he had 
very little money. He did- not mind these 
hardships, for at night, when the stars 
were shining he would look from his gar¬ 
ret window out over the sombre city and 
think how wonderful it would be when 
his beautiful music had brightened its 
gloom. 

At last, when the music was completed 


and he had called all the people to come 
to hear it what do you think happened? 
They did not care for it. They looked at 
each other and said, “I can’t make any¬ 
thing of it. It isn’t pretty.” All the time 
Valerus was playing they were whisper¬ 
ing about their neighbors, laughing at 
rude jokes, and some of them even went 
to sleep. Valerus went sorrowfully back 
to his garret and soon died of a broken 
heart. 

Two hundred years after his death a 
great conservatory of music was estab¬ 
lished in the city where Valerus had 
lived. Some one found the music he had 
composed and gave it to the great mas¬ 
ters, who played it .and said “H6w beau¬ 
tiful!” They taught it to their pupils, 
who soon learned to love the strains 
which the people, two hundred years be¬ 
fore, had not been able to understand. 

The lesson in this little story is easily 
seen. When your teacher gives you a 
piece of music by some great composer 
and you are not able to appreciate it do 
not say, “It is not pretty,” but study it 
thoroughly until you are able by careful 
practice to bring out the beauty of its 
phrases and chords. Then perhaps you 
will say instead, “It is beautiful.” 


Singing Rhythms 


Sometimes you come to a place in your 
piece that has a very complicated, rhythm. 
Sometimes it is syncopation (you remem¬ 
ber what that is, don’t you?) ; or it may 
be a collection of dotted notes or dotted 
rests. Do these places ever give you any 
trouble? Sometimes you can get these 
rhythms very easily; and sometimes you 
get them very anti-easily, or hardly (or 
hardly get them at all, which is it?) 

The next time you come to one of these 
troublesome places, sing it, or whistle it, 
instead of playing it. Clap the time beats 


with your hands and sing or whistle the 
melody to your hand-claps. If it is still 
difficult divide the time beats and clap 
eighth-note beats instead of quarter-note 
beats. 

If you do this several times in succes¬ 
sion, correctly, you will not have any more 
trouble when you play the passage. 

Dojng this helps you to grasp the pass¬ 
age mentally and aurally. (Do you know 
what that means? If not,look it up. That 
will help you to remember.) 


Bang! Crash! Bing! Boom! 

By Rachel Sharpless Spiegel 

See these instruments of percussion, and mark the rhythm when clashed to- 
Ah that strange name sounds like Rus- gether. Tap the triangle, made of steel, 
sian! It simply means that they only and little fairy bells ring and peal. When 

play when someone strikes them, or bangs the tympanist plays all three—that’s the 

away. The big fat fellow’s a Kettledrum thing that amuses me! He skips around 
—his proper name is the Tympanum., with an agile jump, and gives each one 
He’ll growl and mutter, or bang and boom, a quick whack or thump—the Cymbals, 

until you think of the crack of doom. Triangle, then the Drum—gracious how 

The Cymbals hold by the straps of leather, he makes things hum!! 



SEPTEMBER 1921 Page 62'$ 



Sixty Seconds 



What can you do in sixty seconds? 
Give yourself a test, or if you have some 
friends with you give each other a test, 
and that way is really more fun, of course. 

If you belong to a club the whole club 
cau test each other. Get a pencil and 
paper and get ready to write—and put 
your thinking caps on—then look at your 
watch. Sec haw many composers’ names 
you can write down in just sixty seconds. 
The longest list wins of course. Then try 
pianists, or instruments or musical terms. 
Try this either by yourself or with others 
and you will really give yourself some sur¬ 
prises. You know dozens of names, but it 
is hard to make your brain work quickly 
when it is being timed; and one person 
could only think of one name in the entire 
sixty seconds. See what your record is. 



The Piano’s Complaint 


"Oh dear me," the piano said, 

"I feel weary in my head, 

My keys are aching 
And I’m out of tune, 

My pedals squeak. 

I’ll be 'worn out soon. 

Eleven people 

Took lessons to-day 
Hammering me 
And trying to play. 

Eleven people 
Kept banging my keys, 

Until I thought 
A book I’d sicse 

And throw it hard 
At every one 
Who thumped the way 
The first had done. 

No ivonder I am almost dead 
And want to rest my weary head.’ 1 





























































































































THE ETUDE 


Page m SEPTEMBER 1921 

Etude Portrait Series in 
New Form 

The ETurfe Portrait Series published 
in the February (Mozart), March (Men¬ 
delssohn) and April (Beethoven) issues 
brought us a very large number of re¬ 
quests for its continuance. 

We felt however in these days of short¬ 
ages of paper and printing that one entire 
page of The Etude, with sixteen portraits, 
was more than we ought to give every 
month. 

Therefore we shall continue the series 
by printing one portrait each month. These 
will then be reprinted upon plain paper and 
the dozens of teachers who have started 
scrap books for their pupils may obtain a 
supply. We will furnish twenty portraits 
of Verdi, as below, for five cents in stamps. 

The Portraits are also useful to be at¬ 
tached to any sheet of music as a kind of 
daily lesson in Musical History for little 
folks. 



Riddle 


Evangeline Close 

I belong to a knife but not to a spoon; 

I belong to a wit but not to a loon; 

I belong to a tooth, sometimes to a tongue; 
You find me in many a song that you’ve 
sung. 

9. Answer—Sharp. 


A Few Words About Mozart 

By Clara Louise Gray 

Doris and Laurice were two little girls 
studying Musical History. 

“Oh! I do love the name of Mozart,” 
and LSurice looked at Doris and smiled. 

“Do the hard words trouble you, Laur- 

“It says here incomprehensible preco¬ 
city.” 

"I know what that means,” said Doris. 
“It is a prodigy, which is a very bright 
child.” 

“When he was a baby almost, he wrote 
a minuet and I learned it all by heart at my 
last lesson.” 

Doris turned around with a proud gest- 

“Teacher was telling me about Mozart’s 
ear, and how different it is from other ears 
because it was a musician’s, and how as a 
boy he was full of humor and fun; and 
when he went to Italy the Court Ladies 
loved him dearly and called him Little 
Master.” 

Then Laurice said, “I am nine years old, 
and so are you. Just think, Mozart played 
the violin before the Empress Maria 
Theresa at that age, and then five years 
later he wrote an opera for the Christmas 
festivities at Milan.” 

Doris turned to Laurice and throwing 
her arms around her neck said, “Would it 
not be nice if Mozart lived with us now? 
His character was so nice' and kind.” 

“I remember what it says about Mozart’s 
genius,” said Laurice. 

“Teacher says that the book says, that 
the greatest gifts he had were given to 
those who never helped him.” 

“Why?” asked Doris. 

“He needed a true friend to help him in 
his musical work; but he never found one.” 

“Oh dear, I do not like to talk about 
anyone’s dying, do you, Laurice ?” 

“Mozart did not live very long,” and 
Doris looked at the clock with a sigh. 

“I do not like this part for it is so sad; 
but we must not forget it.” 

“Let us rfemember that he died quietly 
and simply, leaving behind him nine hund¬ 
red and twenty compositions.” 

“My next lesson will be about Shubert,” 
said Doris, and then (he two little girls 
jumped up and ran away out Into the bright 
and beautiful sunshine. 


My Unruly Family 



You Can Take a Complete 
Conservatory Course 

Either Students’or Teachers’ and learn how to play or teach correctly, 
in vour spare tfme at home, by the University Extension Method, which 
is now used by leading colleges of the country. 


Sherwood Piano Lessons 
for Students 


Contain complete, explicit instruction on every phase of piano play¬ 
ing. No stone has been left unturned to make this absolut^y porfect 
It would surprise you to know that Sherwood devoted to each lesson 
enough time to earn at least $100.00 in teaching. It is possible for you 
to get all this time and energy for almost nothing, compared to what it 
cost. The lessons are illustrated with life-like photographs of Sherwood 
at the piano. They are given with weekly examination papers. 

Sherwood Normal Lessons 
for Piano Teachers 

Contain the fundamental principles of successful teaching—the vital 
principles—the big things in touch, technique, melody, phrasing, rhythm, 
tone production, interpretation and expression—a complete set ot physi¬ 
cal exercises for developing, strengthening and training the muscles 
of the fingers, hands, wrists, arms and body, fully explained, illustrated 
and made clear by photographs, diagrams and drawings. 


Harmony 

A knowledge of Harmony is necessary for every student and teacher. 
You can study the Harmony Course prepared especially for us by Adolph 
Rosenbecker, former Soloist and Conductor, pupil of Richter; and Dr. 
Daniel Protheroe, Eminent Composer, Choral Conductor and Teacher. 
You will receive the personal instruction of Herbert J. Wrightson, 
Theorist and Composer. 

Harmony Teaches You to 


Artistic Temperaments 

Did you ever hear anyone speak of an 
Artistic Temperament? Very probably you 
did, because everyone likes to talk about 
things they do not understand; and very 
few people understand the artistic tem¬ 
perament; that is, the real one. 

Artistic temperaments are blamed for 
everything that goes wrong, and given as 
an excuse for everything that does not 
go just right. It frequently happens that 
when people lose their things or fail to 
keep their appointments, or let themselves 
become pouty or cross, they are excused 
on account of their so-called artistic tem¬ 
peraments which, as a matter of fact, is 
simply their ugly dispositions and care¬ 
less habits. Instead of being excused they 
should be thoroughly scolded. 

When you grow up you will realize 
the difference between a real artistic tem¬ 
perament and a fake one; and you will 
have no respect at all for the fakes—no¬ 
body has. But while you are young, just 
attend to your own things carefully and 
conscientiously do your practicing regu¬ 
larly and as your teacher directs, take 
care of your books and other possessions, 
and be neat and orderly, and keep your 
engagements—including music lessons— 
promptly. Do not think that you will ever 
amount to anything if you allow yourself 
to be careless and queer and humor your 
fake artistic temperament. 


By Sidney Bushell 

Mv thumbs were very naughty, for they 
seldom would obey, 

My fingers, too, would waggle in the air, 

And though I trained them carefully, an 
hour or so a day 

Their misbehavior filled me with despair. 

Until my teacher told me, in my most de¬ 
spondent mood, 

Some day they will do- just as they are 
told; 

And when I thought how. difficult / find 
it to be good, 

I really couldn’t find the heart to scold. 

So when I’m feeling cranky, and inclined 
to say, “'I won’t 1” 

I think of my own family of ten— 

Two rowdy boys and eight slim girls—Oh, 
well, I simply don’t 

And find I practice so much better then. 


Did you know that there has been a 
strike, of the printers, in different 
parts of the United States? Because 
of this the competition and the puzzle 
is kept out of this Etude. More later. 



4. Detect Wrong Notes and faulty pro¬ 
gressions whether in printed music or dur¬ 
ing the performance of a composition. 

5. Memorize Rapidly, one of the very 
greatest benefits derived from the study of 

^Substitute Other Notes when for any 
reason the ones written are inconvenient 


Advanced Composition 

Edited and personally conducted by Herbert J. Wrightson, distin¬ 
guished theorist and composer. This is the most advanced musical 
course given by any school in America. 

History of Music 

By Glenn Dillard Gunn, noted writer and musician. This History 
Course includes Analysis and Appreciation of Music. 

Unprecedented Special Offer! 

Will you take advantage of our offer of 6 lessons which we offer to 
Etude readers without charge or obligation on their part? We will send 
you 6 lessons from the Normal Piano or Harmony Course or 6 lessons 
selected from some other subject, if you prefer. We have courses in 
Piano (one for students and one for teachers), Harmony, Choral Con¬ 
ducting, Public School Music, Violin, Cornet, Guitar and Mandolin. Select 
the course you are interested in and write now for 6 lessons and catalog. 
You will receive full details of the course and be under no obligation to 
us. The cost is nothing and you will benefit much. 


University Extension Conservatory 

Dept. A-122, Siegel-Myers Bldg. Chicago, Illinois 

Please mention THE ETUDE when adtees5nT'our'"advertlTC7s7" 







Collier’s 


/WEEKLY- 


Tp)0,°o° 


I I h.m 


At New Cut-Prices 


THE ETUDE—for Music Lovers . j ALL for One Year 

American—the world’s greatest magazine . . . ) $5.25 

Woman’s Home Companion—for the American home ) Saves you $1.25 


THE ETUDE—for those who love music [ Our Price $3.25 
Modern Priscilla—pretty things for women^ Saves you 75 cents 


THE ETUDE—over 200 music selections . . . i 

Special Price $3.65 

Pictorial Review— 2,000,000 women read it . . 

| Saves you $1.35 


THE ETUDE and 
McCall’s— 


Both one year 


THE ETUDE and V 

$2.25 


Christian Herald \ 

i Saves you 75c 


(52 issues a year)) 


Both one year 

$3.50 

Saves you 50c 


THE ETUDE and 
Youth’s Companion 


( Both $4.00 

(Saves 50 cents 


THE ETUDE and 
Boy’s Life 

(the Boy Sci 


L.} 


Special $2.50 

Saves $1.50 


THE ETUDE and 
Sunset Magazine 

The big magazine of the Well 


Both $3.25 

Saves $1.25 


THE ETUDE and \ 
Today’s Housewife (; 

(for housekeeping ideas)-' 


Both $2.25 

Saves 75 cents 


THE ETUDE 

Cosmopolitan 


THE ETUDE 
World’s Work 


. $2.00 ) Both $5.75 
. 4.00 J Saves 75c. 


THE ETUDE, Collier’s j All $5.75 
(weekly) & American Magazine j Saves $1.25 


THE ETUDE and 
Peoples Home Journal 


J $2.75 


THE ETUDE 
THE ETUDE 
THE ETUDE 
THE ETUDE 
THE ETUDE 
THE ETUDE 
THE ETUDE 
THE ETUDE 
THE ETUDE 
THE ETUDE 


and Pathfinder . . . 

and Woman’s World . 
and Mother’s Magazine, 
and American Boy 
and American Woman, 
and Fashionable Dress, 
and Illustrated World, 
and Motion Picture . 
and Musical America, 
and Musical Observer, 


Both 

$4.25 


THE ETUDE 
Garden . . 


$2.00 } Both $4.25 
3.00 ) Saves 75c. 


THE ETUDE and ) Both 

Woman’s Home Companion j $3.75 


THE ETUDE and 
McClures 


1 Both 

j $3.25 


THE ETUDE and 
THE ETUDE and 
THE ETUDE and 
THE ETUDE and 
THE ETUDE and 
THE ETUDE and 
THE ETUDE and 
THE ETUDE and 
THE ETUDE and 


The Musician . . $4.7E 

The Organist . . 3.50 

Violin World . . 3.25 

The Violinist . . 3.50 

Shadowland . . 4.80 

Everybody’s . . 4.50 

Short Stories . . 6.75 

Review of Reviews, 4.25 
Little Folks . . 3.50 


The Saturday Evening Post $2.00 (Reduced j now 

The Ladies’ Home Journal. . 1.50 \ $ f ™“ # tag 
The Country Gentleman .... 1.00( •*—) 

If you enjoy music you will enjoy THE ETUDE 


THEO. PRESSER CO., Philadelphia, Pa. 



























































































































ESTABLISHED J883 

THEODORE PRESSER CO. 

J7J0-I7I2-I7I4 Chestnut Street 
PHILADELPHIA, PA. 

Music Publishers and Dealers 

General Music Supply House 

An Unexcelled Stock of all Music Publications for the Needs of 
Teachers, Students, Artists, Choirs, Choruses, Bands and Orchestras 

TALKING MACHINES AND RECORDS 

Vlctrolas, Brunswick Phonographs and Cheney Talking Machines 
Victor Records and Brunswick Records 


STANDARD GRADED 
COURSE OF STUDIES 

FOR THE PIANOFORTE 
In Ten Grades— Ten Volumes 

By W. S. B. Mathews Price, $1.00 


Jin Uncqualcd Educational Work for Plano 


This is a complete, progressives* 
studies for the piano from the very 1 

tage to pupils. Except for young 
Btarted with the first book. Where 
course with the "Beginner s Book." 


PRESSER SERVICE TO MUSIC TEACHERS 

Liberal Examination Privileges—Best Professional Discounts 
Prompt and Efficient Service—Convenient Charge Accounts 


BEGINNER'S BOOK 

SCHOOL OF THE PIANOFORTE—Vol. One 

By Theodore Presser Price, $1.00 


I Used More Exlcmiixlu Than Ann Other Elementary Instruction Book 

The simplicity of this work has enabled many teachers tc 


GROVE'S DICTIONARY 

-OF— 

MUSIC AND MUSICIANS 

- WITH— 

New American Supplement 

A Musical Encyclopedia 
Abundantly Supplies Ail Musi¬ 
cal Reference Needs 

What the “Encyclopedia Britan- 
“GroveV’ is to Music. 9 ver 
produce this wonderful work. The 
record of American Mus 


'THE GREAT “GROVE'S DICTIONARY'' 

With the AMERICAN SUPPLEMENT 

SIX VOLUMES, COMPLETE, $20 SEPARATE COPIES OF SUPPLEMENT. $3.50 


. 


M 



YOU CAN HAVE THIS 
BEST OF MUSICAL WORKS 
IN YOUR OWN HOME 
LIBRARY! 

Buy a Set on Easy Terms 
A FEW DOLLARS WILL BRING 


The Theodore Presser Co. 
secured publishing rights on 
“Grove’s Dictionary” in order 
that Music Lovers might pur¬ 
chase it at the lowest possible price 
and under the most liberal pur¬ 
chase terms. 

-PRICE $20.00- 


An Incomparable Musical Reference Library—Six Large Volumes—Bound in Cloth—Stamped in Gold—Illustrated 


Standard History of Music 

| BY JAMES FRANCIS COOKE PRICE $1.50 

A History that Has Pleased Thousands 
So Clear that a Child Can Understand Every Word 
So Absorbing that Adults are Charmed With It 

ds are “self-pronounced.” Bound in cloth, stamped in gold. 


All difficult 


Harmony Book for Beginners 

BY PRESTON WARE OREM PRICE $1.25 

Teachers Achieve Speedy Results With This Harmony 
Book. Also the Best and Most Practical Work 
for Self-Study in Harmony 

An unequaled “success”. The main essentials of harmony are made 
understandable in a clear, concise manner and everything is presented 
simply, yet in an engaging manner. A work that lays a strong foundation 
for future musicianship. Flexible cloth binding. 



THOUSANDS OF SUCCESSFUL TEACHING PIECES FOR THE PIANOFORTE 

Are Presser Publications. A Few Favorites in the First Three Grades are Named Below. Selected Lists and Catalogs Giving 
Carefully-graded Material from the Very Beginning to the Highest Grade Cheerfully Furnished Teachers Requesting Them. 


FIRST GRADE 


16379 Dreaming Poppies.. 
7664 Turtle Doves .... 
16415 Beginning to Play- 


16578 

2262 Pour Lei 
11165 Comean. 
16452 Haymaki 
16338 The Big 


EASY Pi 

id Drum Brigade. ...Spaulding $0 

Croon.Strickland 

^eaf Clover Waltz.Engelmann 


SECOND GRADE 


Cat. No. 

8952 No Si 
11063 Queer 


...Loeb-Evans 


16557 Dance of the Chimes.Felton *0.30 

16850 Sea Foam, Scherzo.Preston JO 

16861 America Victorious.Strickland .30 

8899 Twilight Song.Shackley .50 

““ **.U- .Engel .30 


HAD FOR EXAMINATION THROUGH 
Enjoy the convenience of this plan. Teachers may select numbers from any 
of our lists and catalogs or we will cheerfully make up packages covering 
desired grades. Numbers not used are returnable. 


4185 Flying Sparks.... 

16294 At the Dancing School.. 

16112 A Dance in the Village.I 

7779 June Morning.Foi 

12916 The Soldier’s Song... .Steinhe 


THIRD GRADE 

Price Cat, No. 

...Engel 30.30 8235 Rose Petals. 

Anthonv 30 3170 Plavinv Tav 

kZ 3 Mg Li; 

14123 Na 


of the Flower Fairies 


ZSSBA